Nemo Outdoor User Manual

WWW.ANITE.
COM/NEMO
NEMO OUTDOOR
USER MANUAL
DOCUMENT NUMBER
NNNNNNNNN ISSUE N
Anite 2015
NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL
Copyright
The information contained in this document is confidential and no part of it may be copied or
reproduced in any form without the written consent of Anite Network Testing. Additionally, this
document is not to be passed to or discussed with third parties without the prior written permission
of Anite Network Testing.
Anites products are subject to continual development and specifications may change. Users of
Anites products and documentation should exercise their own independent judgement to evaluate
the suitability of Anites products and documentation for their particular use. Anite does not accept
any liability arising from the application or use of the product or this documentation.
All reasonable care has been made to ensure that this document is accurate. If you have any
comments on this document, or would like details of any Anite products, services or equipment,
please contact us through the Anite website.
Page 2
CONTENTS
1 QUICK GUIDE .................................................................................................. 9

1.1
Setting up the system ............................................................................... 9
1.2
Data measurements ................................................................................ 10
1.3
Using Nemo Outdoor ............................................................................... 12
1.3.1
Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options .................................. 12
2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ........................................................................................ 13

2.1
Licensing ............................................................................................... 14
2.1.1
Migration process for old USB dongle keys .......................................... 15
2.1.2
Migration process for new USB dongle keys ......................................... 17
2.1.3
Technical support expiration.............................................................. 18
2.2
Important .............................................................................................. 18
2.2.1
Local laws and regulations ................................................................ 19
2.2.2
Nemo Outdoor laptop settings ........................................................... 19
2.2.3
Traffic safety .................................................................................. 20
2.2.4
Operating environment .................................................................... 21
3 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................ 22

3.1
Voice testing .......................................................................................... 22
3.2
Circuit-switched data testing ..................................................................... 22
3.3
Packet-switched data testing .................................................................... 22
3.4
Nemo Media Router ................................................................................. 23
3.4.1
Installing Nemo Media Router ............................................................ 23
3.4.2
Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license ................................. 26
3.4.3
TeamViewer QuickSupport ................................................................ 27
3.5
Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite........................................................................... 29
3.6
Nemo Invex II ........................................................................................ 30
3.7
Indoor measurements .............................................................................. 31
4 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM............................................................... 32

4.1
Hardware and software requirements ......................................................... 32
4.2
Other hardware requirements ................................................................... 32
4.3
Nemo Outdoor software installation ........................................................... 33
4.4
Nemo Outdoor device set-up..................................................................... 33
4.4.1
Connecting a GPS receiver ................................................................ 33
4.4.2
Connecting a scanner ....................................................................... 34
4.4.3
Connecting voice quality devices ........................................................ 34
4.5
Nemo Invex device set-up ........................................................................ 34
4.5.1
Page 3
Nemo Invex Status view ................................................................... 38
4.5.2
4.6
Two data connections on one measurement server ............................... 39
General guidelines for drive testing ............................................................ 40
5 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................. 43

5.1
Configuring Nemo Outdoor ....................................................................... 43
5.1.1
Configuration through Welcome page ................................................. 43
5.1.2
Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog ........................ 47
5.1.3
Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually .................................................. 49
5.1.4
Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup ........ 49
5.2
Configuring test mobiles ........................................................................... 50
5.3
Configuration Manager ............................................................................. 51
5.3.1
Handler information ......................................................................... 52
5.3.2
User interface ................................................................................. 52
5.3.3
Notifications ................................................................................... 64
5.3.4
Scripts ........................................................................................... 68
5.3.5
Base station files ............................................................................. 69
5.3.6
Device configurations ....................................................................... 69
5.3.7
Devices .......................................................................................... 70
5.3.8
View groups.................................................................................... 76
5.4
Measurement Properties dialog.................................................................. 76
5.4.1
Measurement Properties General ..................................................... 77
5.4.2
Measurement Properties Measurement ............................................. 78
5.4.3
Measurement Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles .................. 82
5.4.4
Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with mobiles .......................... 85
5.4.5
Measurement Properties Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with
scanners .................................................................................................... 85
5.4.6
Measurement Properties - Script ........................................................ 86
6 DURING MEASUREMENTS................................................................................. 87
6.1
Textual notes.......................................................................................... 87
6.2
Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex ................ 88
6.2.1
Nemo Commander server options ...................................................... 89
6.2.2
Initial field unit configuration ............................................................. 90
6.2.3
Measurement workflow..................................................................... 90
6.2.4
Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander ..... 91
6.3
Making scanning measurements ................................................................ 92
6.3.1
With a scanner ................................................................................ 92
6.3.2
With a mobile ................................................................................. 92
6.4
Making voice calls ................................................................................... 92
6.4.1
Voice Call Configuration .................................................................... 93
6.4.2
Voice Call Properties TETRA ............................................................ 97
6.4.3
Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing ................................................................ 98
6.5
Voice quality measurements ................................................................... 101
6.6
Making video calls ................................................................................. 102
6.7
Data transfers ...................................................................................... 104
6.7.1
Page 4
Configuring the data connection ...................................................... 105
6.7.2
Configuring the FTP protocol ........................................................... 110
6.7.3
Configuring the SFTP protocol ......................................................... 113
6.7.4
Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol ..................................................... 115
6.7.5
Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol ......................................... 118
6.7.6
Configuring the POP3 protocol ......................................................... 120
6.7.7
Configuring the SMTP protocol ......................................................... 121
6.7.8
Configuring the IMAP protocol ......................................................... 124
6.7.9
Configuring the WAP protocol .......................................................... 126
6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol .................................................. 128

6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol ................................................. 129
6.7.12 Making data transfers .................................................................... 131
6.8
Streaming video quality testing ............................................................... 132
6.8.1
6.9
PEVQ-S Properties dialog ................................................................ 134
VoIP calls ............................................................................................. 135
6.10 Application testing ................................................................................. 138

6.10.1 Facebook testing ........................................................................... 138
6.10.2 Twitter testing .............................................................................. 141
6.10.3 Instagram testing .......................................................................... 145
6.10.4 Dropbox testing ............................................................................ 148
6.11 SMS testing .......................................................................................... 151
6.11.1 SMS testing with CDMA terminals .................................................... 152
6.12 MMS testing ......................................................................................... 153
6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS ...................................................... 153
6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog .......................................................................... 155
6.12.3 Making MMS measurements ............................................................ 155
6.12.4 MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 .................................... 156
6.13 USSD testing ........................................................................................ 160
6.14 Start external application ....................................................................... 161
6.15 ICMP Ping ............................................................................................ 162
6.16 Indoor mode ........................................................................................ 164
6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps ...................................................................... 165
6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files ................................................................. 167
6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans .......................................................... 169
6.16.4 Indoor route planning .................................................................... 170
6.16.5 iBwave maps ................................................................................ 171
6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis .................................................................... 175
6.16.7 RF ingress analysis ........................................................................ 177
6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu ................................................................ 178
6.17 Measurement profiles ............................................................................ 186
6.18 IP packet capturing ............................................................................... 186
6.19 Making script files ................................................................................. 187
6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands ........................................................ 189
6.19.2 Add menu .................................................................................... 192
6.19.3 Running scripts ............................................................................. 203
6.20 Measurement lists ................................................................................. 204
Page 5
6.20.1 Measurement areas ....................................................................... 208

6.21 Forcing functions ................................................................................... 209
6.21.1 Channel locking ............................................................................. 210
6.21.2 Band locking ................................................................................. 211
6.21.3 Network selection .......................................................................... 212
6.21.4 Handover control ........................................................................... 213
6.21.5 Cell barring................................................................................... 219
6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode) ......................................... 219
6.21.7 AMR codec forcing ......................................................................... 220
6.22 Cell testing ........................................................................................... 220
6.23 Missing Neighbor Detection ..................................................................... 221
6.23.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile .......................................... 222
6.23.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile ............ 223
6.24 Pilot pollution analysis............................................................................ 225
6.24.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone ................................... 226
6.24.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements ............ 228
6.24.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones ........................... 228
6.24.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners .................................. 229
6.25 GSM interference analysis ...................................................................... 229
6.26 Band scan ............................................................................................ 231
6.27 Timeslot testing .................................................................................... 234
6.28 Viewing graphs ..................................................................................... 236
6.28.1 Graph popup menu ........................................................................ 237
6.28.2 Zoom - Scatter graph..................................................................... 240
6.28.3 Graph side panel - Layers ............................................................... 241
6.28.4 Graph side panel Values and parameter ......................................... 248
6.28.5 Graph layer color configuration ........................................................ 250
6.28.6 Spectrum graphs ........................................................................... 254
6.28.7 Color grid graphs ........................................................................... 256
6.28.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph .................................... 256
6.29 Viewing grids ........................................................................................ 257
6.29.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message ................... 258
6.29.2 Grid popup menu .......................................................................... 258
6.30 Viewing maps ....................................................................................... 282
6.30.1 Base stations on a map .................................................................. 284
6.30.2 MapX maps .................................................................................. 286
6.30.3 Route plans .................................................................................. 288
6.30.4 Map popup menu........................................................................... 291
6.30.5 Color Set Editor ............................................................................. 315
6.30.6 Map example 1 ............................................................................. 318
6.30.7 Map example 2 ............................................................................. 319
6.30.8 Map example 3 ............................................................................. 320
6.30.9 Map example 4 ............................................................................. 321
6.30.10 Map example 5 ............................................................................. 322
6.30.11 Map Example 6 ............................................................................. 324
Page 6
6.31 Export/import settings ........................................................................... 326

6.31.1 Export settings to file ..................................................................... 326
6.31.2 Export settings to FTP server .......................................................... 327
6.31.3 Import settings from file ................................................................. 328
6.31.4 Import settings from FTP server ...................................................... 329
7 ENDING MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................... 331
7.1
Measurement report .............................................................................. 332
8 MEASUREMENT RESULTS ............................................................................... 334

8.1
Analyzing measurement results ............................................................... 334
8.2
Playing back measurement files............................................................... 334
8.2.1
Selecting playback files .................................................................. 334
8.2.2
During playback ............................................................................ 335
8.2.3
Viewing and moving markers .......................................................... 336
8.2.4
Closing playback files ..................................................................... 337
8.3
Uploading measurement files to server ..................................................... 337
8.3.1
FTP Options .................................................................................. 338
8.3.2
Nemo Xynergy Options ................................................................... 339
8.4
Exporting measurements ........................................................................ 340
9 USER INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 344

9.1
View groups ......................................................................................... 344
9.2
Menu bar ............................................................................................. 345
9.3
Toolbar ................................................................................................ 345
9.4
Status bar ............................................................................................ 345
9.5
Nemo Outdoor menus ............................................................................ 345
9.5.1
File menu ..................................................................................... 346
9.5.2
Edit menu .................................................................................... 347
9.5.3
View menu ................................................................................... 347
9.5.4
Measurement menu ....................................................................... 348
9.5.5
Remote menu ............................................................................... 349
9.5.6
Playback menu .............................................................................. 350
9.5.7
Data menu ................................................................................... 350
9.5.8
Window menu ............................................................................... 351
9.5.9
Help menu.................................................................................... 351
9.6
Parameters view ................................................................................... 352
9.6.1
Page 7
Parameters view search functionality ................................................ 353
9.7
Customizing menus and toolbars ............................................................. 353
9.8
Nemo Outdoor windows ......................................................................... 356
9.8.1
Custom windows ........................................................................... 357
9.8.2
Devices view ................................................................................. 358
9.8.3
Device Status view ........................................................................ 360
9.8.4
Output window .............................................................................. 362
9.8.5
Script Status window ..................................................................... 362
9.8.6
Controlling windows ....................................................................... 362
10 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................... 364

10.1 Low throughput .................................................................................... 364
10.1.1 All Windows versions ..................................................................... 365
10.2 Device Status view ................................................................................ 368
10.3 Cannot add devices ............................................................................... 368
10.4 Required license option missing ............................................................... 369
10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers ......................................................... 369
10.6 Measurement file checksum notification .................................................... 369
10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded ............................................................ 369
11 NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS ............................................................................ 371
11.1 Toolbar buttons .................................................................................... 371
11.2 Dialog buttons ...................................................................................... 372
11.3 Graph toolbar buttons ............................................................................ 373
11.4 Map toolbar buttons .............................................................................. 374
12 SHORTCUT KEYS .......................................................................................... 376
13 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 377
14 TECHNICAL SUPPORT .................................................................................... 380
14.1 User Club ............................................................................................. 380
14.2 Nemo Support Portal ............................................................................. 380
14.3 Phone and Email Support ....................................................................... 380
15 APPENDIX 1 ................................................................................................. 382
15.1 Making MapInfo raster maps ................................................................. 382
15.1.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo SW ...................................... 382
16 APPENDIX 2 ................................................................................................. 384
16.1 CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor ....................................... 384
17 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT .................................................................... 388
Page 8
QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how
to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on
using Nemo Outdoor.
1.1
Setting up the system
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install
Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
1.
Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see
Hardware and software requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo
Outdoor.exe. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup.
2.
When the installation is finished, restart the computer.
3.
The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the
computers USB ports.
4.
If you are making data measurements, you need to configure the measurement devices and
install drivers. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide provided in the
Nemo Outdoor package.
5.
On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously
viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device
Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in
online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the
work offline
button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection
functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices
connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM ports to
them.
6.
To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a
Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see Configuration
through Load Device Configuration dialog).
Page 9
7.
If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you
prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and
starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode
and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to
the measurement system and click the work offline button
8.
in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open
Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved
device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in
online of offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device,
select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this from the
configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the Autodetect
devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices, which
automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports.
9.
Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) to add measurement devices manually.
Select the Device item and click the Add button
. Select the device type (phone, scanner,
GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the
Device Configuration dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK.
10. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows Explorer to
copy all the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps.
Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager
dialog, double-click the User Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field,
browse the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default
map file (see User Interface Properties Paths).
11. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example,
C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the
Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in
the BTS File field. Click OK. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should
appear on the map.
1.2
Data measurements
A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.
Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement
mobile.
Setting up data measurements:

1.
Configure the measurement device in the Device Configuration dialog (see Device
configuration for mobiles and modems). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a
data connection.
2.
Open the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog (see Measurement Properties

Measurement). Please note that the selection is device-specific.
Page 10
3.
For circuit-switched data measurements, double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item
to define Data Call Properties. For packet-switched data calls, double-click the Packet
Session item to define Packet session settings.
4.
Select and configure a data protocol in by double-clicking the item under Supported Data
Protocols.
5.
To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data
measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (see ICMP
Ping).
6.
To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data

measurements), double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing
Settings (see SMS testing).
7.
To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data

measurements), double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the
MMS Settings (see MMS testing).
8.
To set up USSD measurements (can be performed simultaneously with data

measurements), double-click the USSD Message field and define the USSD Message
Settings (see USSD testing).
9.
Page 11
Click OK. You can now start data measurements.
1.3
Using Nemo Outdoor

When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and is
ready for measurements.
1.
First, open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the
measurement. Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that
contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).
2.
You can use Scripts (see Scripts) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will
execute automatically. Click the Device script settings button
in the Devices view.
Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script
Editor button.
3.
If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the
Notifications function (see Notifications). Click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog.
4.
Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button
. Nemo Outdoor will start the
recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the
recording and the script, click the Stop button
5.
To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call
or send MMS message, from the Measurement control
6.
Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button
menu.
. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a
measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computers hard disk. You can
playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click
the Rename button to change the file name.
7.
Click the Start Playback button

button
to playback a file. During playback use the Pause
to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that
particular point in time.
1.3.1
Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options

Outdoor supports the following command line options. These command lines will enable the user to
enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command
Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop
and enter the command line to the shortcuts Properties | Shortcut |Target field.
/W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor
/H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor
/M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to save
any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace
/DEBUGBIN will start debug logging
For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace,
N95.hwcx hardware configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking
effect.
Page 12
Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool
Software developed by Anite.
Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of
digital networks. The supported network standards are:
cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz
CDMA2000
1xEVDO
AMPS
DVB-H
EGPRS
GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz
GPRS
HSDPA
HSUPA
HSPA+
LTE
TD-SCDMA
TETRA
iDEN
UMTS (FDD mode)
WiMAX
Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement
results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard
disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and
maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool
Nemo Analyze.
Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of
supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.
Page 13
2.1
Licensing
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo
Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.
A new license type and dongle HW was introduced with Nemo Outdoor 7.5.0. All fielded dongle keys
and licenses must be migrated to a new dongle when used with Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or
higher.
To make the migration easier for our customers, Anite Network Testing has developed a userfriendly dongle migration tool that is capable of performing the migration. The old dongle key and
the new dongle key must be connected to the PC where the migration tool is installed. The tool
deactivates the old dongle and activates and registers the new one.
The new USB dongle key must be available before updating Nemo Outdoor application to
version 7.5.0 or higher. Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or higher is not backwards compatible with
the old license dongles.
The computer used for the dongle migration must be connected to the internet.
If the old dongle key contains both Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze licenses, please do not
run the migration tool. Instead, contact nemo.support@anite.com.
Before running the migration tool, please check the TS Expiration date for the old dongle key
from the Nemo Outdoor Help menu (About | License Information). If your technical support
agreement has expired, do not run the migration tool. Migration can be done only with dongle
keys that have a valid TS agreement. If your TS agreement has expired, please contact Anite
Network Testing, nemo.support@anite.com.
Before starting the migration process please check what kind of dongle key you are currently using
with Nemo Outdoor. If you have the old dongle key shown in Figure 1, please see the instructions in
chapter Migration process for old USB dongle keys.
Figure 1.Old dongle key.

If you have the new dongle key shown in Figure 2, please see the instructions in chapter Migration
process for new USB dongle keys.
Page 14
Figure 2. New dongle key.
2.1.1
1.
Migration process for old USB dongle keys

Anite sends an empty dongle (without a product license) automatically to all customers with a valid
TS agreement. The new dongle will be sent to a separately agreed customer address. In case you
have not been contacted by Anite regarding the dongle migration, please contact
nemosupport@anite.com.
2.
After receiving the empty dongle, download and install the migration tool from:
3.
www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip
Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze
installed.
4.
Plug in both the old and the new dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool.
Both dongles MUST be plugged in simultaneously.
Do not unplug the dongle keys during the migration process. This may permanently damage
the keys.
5. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.
Page 15
Figure 3.Migration tool.

6.
Make sure the migration tool identifies both dongles (keys) connected (Time and Time Driverless
dongles). They should appear in the Connected keys table.
7.
Click the Migrate License button.
8.
The migration tool reads the license details from the old dongle and sends the details to Anite
Network Testing over the internet.
9.
Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration
tool over the internet.
10. The migration tool activates the new dongle and writes the new license details on the dongle. The
migration tool also tests that the new dongle works properly.
11. After testing that the new dongle works properly, the migration tool deactivates the old dongle and
informs the customer that the migration process was successful and the new dongle with the
product license is ready for use.
12. The migration tool can now be uninstalled and the old dongle key can be disposed of.
Page 16
2.1.2
1.
Migration process for new USB dongle keys

Download and install the migration tool from:
2.
www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip
Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze
installed.
3.
Plug in the dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool.
Do not unplug the dongle key during the migration process. This may permanently damage the
key.
4. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.
Figure 4. Migration tool.

5.
Click the Migrate License button.
6.
The migration tool reads the license details from the dongle and sends the details to Anite Network
Testing over the internet.
7.
Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration
tool over the internet.
8.
The migration tool writes the new license details on the dongle. The migration tool also tests that
the dongle works properly.
9.
After testing that the dongle works properly, the migration tool informs the customer that the
migration process was successful and the dongle with the new product license is ready for use.
10. The migration tool can now be uninstalled.
Page 17
2.1.3
Technical support expiration

The USB dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor include a compulsory technical support and
maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the
agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor
application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 7.50 with a 1-year
technical support maintenance agreement in April 2015. The customer is entitled for free updates
until April 2016. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2016 cannot be used with the USB key
without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the technical support &
maintenance agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and the customer can update
the application to the latest version.
2.2
Important
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling
behind wireless technologies.
The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200,
TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been
verified by Anite. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite does not guarantee
that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description for a list
of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo
Outdoor system is running.
With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a
wrong number.
With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated.
In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct
levels. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document.
Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power
of the mobile.
After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test
mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo
Outdoor triggered events in the mobile.
Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo
Outdoor test devices to the computers USB port.
When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is
reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are
regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.
Page 18
2.2.1 Local laws and regulations

Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations on
the use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of the
country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test device is
used. Anite assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the local
laws and/or regulations.
2.2.2
Nemo Outdoor laptop settings

The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below are
described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement results.
2.2.2.1 Power options

Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the
laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to
Control Panel | System and Security | Power Options. Select the High performance power
plan.
2.2.2.2 Active protection system

If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop when
jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In voice
quality testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in the
measurement data.
With Lenovo laptops, select Control Panel | System and Security | Lenovo Active Protection.
On the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.
Page 19
2.2.2.3 USB hub properties

Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial
Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the
Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to
save power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.
2.2.3
Traffic safety
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety
comes first.
Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time.
Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Anite
assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.
Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.
Page 20
2.2.4
Operating environment
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the
devices used by Nemo Outdoor.
Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is
forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic
devices.
Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.
Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or
sites where blasting operations are in progress.
Page 21
NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3.1
Voice testing
The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user
provided or, optionally, provided by Anite with all the software installed). The package also includes
the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency
scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.
3.2
Circuit-switched data testing

The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit
(Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a data server. The data server is used to establish a
data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server
can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to
four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test
terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping,
Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). CS data testing is possible on all cellular
technologies that support circuit-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If
you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive
mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit
can only receive files.
The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the
desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs
and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme
and number of timeslots.
3.3
Packet-switched data testing

The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit
and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a
Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve
multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports
FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route testing, and RTSP (video
streaming). PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched
data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If
you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive
mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit
can only receive files.
Page 22
During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on
different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of
timeslots.
3.4
Nemo Media Router

Nemo Media Router (NMR) is Anites proprietary communications interface and application
developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NMR interface, smartphones communicate with
PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex, enabling voice quality
(PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any additional hardware.
When performing voice quality measurements with NMR, the smartphone records the received
sample audio files and transfers audio files via the NMR interface to the test computer in real time.
The computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values are written in the Nemo
Outdoor log file. Eight phones can be connected to one CPU simultaneously.
Also data transfers can be made using Nemo Media Router installed on the smartphone.
NMR versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not supported with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x.
Customers using Nemo Media Router 1.0 or 1.1 should not update Nemo Outdoor to the
latest version before updating the Nemo Media Router application on the test handsets.
Nemo Media Router application and update instructions are available from the Nemo User
Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com.
NMR Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NMR license server automatically
for all the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Media Router 2.00 application on
the phone after installation.
3.4.1
Installing Nemo Media Router

This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Media Router. Handsets
ordered with Nemo Media Route come preinstalled from Anite. If you wish to use your existing
Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the Nemo Media Router first. Please check the Nemo
Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices.
Requirements:
Nemo Handy firmware
1.
Next install the Nemo Media Router on the mobile (if not preinstalled by Anite). Connect the
device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the NemoMediaRouter.apk file on your device
in the Nemo folder.
Page 23
2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the
NemoMediaRouter.apk file.
3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.
Page 24
4.
After the Nemo Media Router application has started, restart the device.
5.
When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex.
6.
When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor/Invex, the Nemo Media Router
application is started automatically. If the Nemo Media Router does not appear, start the
application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the device to Nemo Outdoor.
7. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration from the bottom of the
view.
8.
In the Device Configuration Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo Media
Router field and define the correct Trace and Modem ports. Click OK. The device is now
ready.
Page 25
3.4.2
Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license

After installation, existing Nemo Media Router users can fetch software updates and a license overthe-air from the NMR license server by launching the Nemo Media Router application on the phone.
In the License Browser view, select the correct license.
Confirm by selecting Load.
After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts, you
can connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Media Router will start automatically.
Page 26
To check for software updates, make sure that WiFi or mobile data (with HIM devices) is enabled,
press the
3.4.3
button at the bottom of the NMR main view and select Check for updates.
TeamViewer QuickSupport
When handset isolation modules are used in Nemo Invex II, changing settings and updating the
NMR software can be done remotely with TeamViewer QuickSupport without opening the housing.
With TeamViewer it is possible to make a remote connection to the test handset via the Nemo
Outdoor user interface. Please note that one active connection at a time is supported, i.e.
connections to several handsets simultaneously are not possible. The laptop running Nemo Outdoor
must be connected to the internet, for example, by using a dedicated handset or a USB modem
connected to the controlling laptop. The test handset must be in service and support data services.
Packet data must be enabled.
The TeamViewer Quick Support (QS) application and TeamViewer Remote Control add-on module
are preinstalled to all test handsets delivered by Anite Network Testing with the Nemo Invex
handset isolation modules. TeamViewer must be installed also to the PC running Nemo Outdoor.
These applications can be downloaded from the Nemo User Club.
Please note that TeamViewer can be used free of charge only with non-commercial use.
Customers using the UI monitoring and controlling with the TeamViewer tools for
commercial use must obtain the licenses directly from TeamViewer
(www.teamviewer.com).
Page 27
To control the NMR device from Nemo Outdoor, right-click the device in the Devices view and select
Open Remote Connection.
Nemo Outdoor will connect to the device and open the TeamViewer window with a view of the
device screen. You can now control the device.
Page 28
3.5
Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite

The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use
with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system
technologies and networks with support for up to eight test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a
sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use
of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data
transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test
vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.
Page 29
3.6
Nemo Invex II
Nemo Invex II is the most powerful and advanced benchmarking system for testing with large
wireless device configurations with high data rates LTE-A Cat 6 and beyond - with rich suite of
application testing options. The system enables testing with up to 50 test UEs and with up to three
scanners simultaneously with lower power consumption per device, giving operators, network
vendors, regulators, and contractors the possibility to benchmark voice and data services on all
available wireless technologies in one test drive.
In the new Nemo Invex II design, the main focus has been on reliability in extreme conditions. The
design boasts sophisticated built-in cooling and heating and replaceable air filters. The enhanced
capacity of Nemo Invex II offers support for the largest number of test devices in the world. Yet,
power efficiency has not been overlooked: the power usage per UIC has been cut in half thanks to
the innovative design.
The system has improved UPS functions including backup for scanners as well as built-in monitoring
for power, temperature, and current maintaining the measurement system at optimal temperature.
Furthermore, USB charging 1.2 compliant ports enable the charging of the measurement devices in
long measurement sessions. Native SuperSpeed USB 3.0 ports support LTE-A Cat 6 test devices
and beyond.
The one size chassis allows totally free mix and match modularity between the chassis via the
advanced Invex Chassis NET communication interface. Compared to current commercial
benchmarking systems, the need for manual cabling has been reduced dramatically. The system is
designed for easy installation and usage in cars with wireless connectivity to the control PC, built-in
ambient lights and KVM (keyboard, video, and mouse) for improved usability even in
environments with less light.
Page 30
3.7
Indoor measurements
Nemo Outdoor has an indoor mode measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be
installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers
cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click
markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also possible to
use BTS files with floorplans. With Nemo Walker, test equipment can be easily taken inside
buildings.
Page 31
INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR

SYSTEM
This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make
sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo
Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files
onto your computer.
Note that for Windows 7 and Windows 8, the installation must be run under
Administrator account or other user account with administrative privileges. Note that if
the existing Nemo Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x or older it must be uninstalled via add or
remove programs before the Nemo Outdoor 7.x installation can be ran. During Sentinel
HASP driver installation, you are prompted to restart the computer. Press Restart later
to continue with the Nemo Outdoor installation.
4.1
4.2
Hardware and software requirements
PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 Professional (32/64 bit)
Processor Intel Core i7 2.66GHz or higher
SSD drive recommended
100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 4 GB recommended
One USB port for copy protection module
Ethernet port RJ45
Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended
Memory 4GB RAM minimum, 8GB recommended
Other hardware requirements

The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning
receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette
lighter plug).
Page 32
External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted
GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)

o
Garmin GPS II
Garmin GPS II Plus
Garmin GPS III/III+
Garmin GPS 35
Garmin V
4.3
Garmin 18 USB
Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit
Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output
Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing)
Nemo Outdoor software installation

To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor:
If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before
installation. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on
Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.
Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.
1.
Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor
x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When
the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We recommend that
you select the Complete setup type.
2.
When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the
computer.
To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:

1.
Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo

Outdoor and select Uninstall.
Note that uninstallation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.
4.4
Nemo Outdoor device set-up

Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.
However, instructions for devices that require a data connection can be found in the Device
Configuration Guide.
4.4.1
Connecting a GPS receiver

1.
Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.
2.
Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.
3.
Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add
button
4.
Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.
5.
Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically
sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection.
6.
Page 33
Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.
4.4.2
Connecting a scanner
See the Nemo Scanner Guide and Nemo FSR1 User Manual documents for information on how to
connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.
4.4.3
Connecting voice quality devices

Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete installation and configuration
instructions.
4.5
Nemo Invex device set-up

After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement
servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo
Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Click the Measurement servers
button in the
Devices view.
A list of available measurement servers and UICs is displayed. Click Refresh to find all
measurement servers connected to the system.
To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change to
Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor.
Finally, click Close.
The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices
connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices
connected to the measurement servers.
Page 34
A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. Define whether the device will
be used for voice quality or data measurements. Read chapter Two data connections on one
measurement server for more information on having two active data connections on a single
measurement server.
If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration
supported by the scanner.
Page 35
Finally click Online. The Start Devices dialog opens. Here you can review the UIC and device
information. If you are happy with the configuration, click Online or Offline to add the devices to
Nemo Outdoor.
You can also restart and reboot the UICs, the OS, and the USB ports or individual UIC modules.
Right-click on the UIC and select the command from the context menu.
Page 36
The Nemo FSR1 scanner needs to be added manually. Click the Add or remove devices button in
the Devices view and select Add New Device. In the Add New Device dialog, select the Nemo
FSR1 and select a UIC in the field at the bottom of the dialog.
It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration
As. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.
To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a
measurement server and click Disconnect.
Page 37
4.5.1
Nemo Invex Status view

The Nemo Invex Status view displays information about the current Nemo Invex hardware
configuration. The image shows the actual configuration and relevant health information for the
selected module. If there are more than one chassis, the chassis are numbered and you can
arrange the view by dragging and dropping the chassis. The Nemo Invex Status view also displays
all possible hardware alerts, such as high/low voltage and battery shutdown.
The UIC and HIM module connections are color-coded. If you select a HIM module from the image,
the USB port where the HIM module is connected to will be highlighted with the same color.
You can also reset individual USB ports by right-clicking the USB port in the image and selecting the
command from the context menu.
Page 38
The Nemo Invex Systems view displays detailed information about the UICs and the devices. You
can disconnect UICs and refresh the view. For HIM modules, the device information is shown.
4.5.2
Two data connections on one measurement server

You can have two active data connections on a single measurement server. For example, MMS can
be tested with one test device while another device is performing an FTP transfer. The data routing
option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex allowing more than one active data connection.
However, when routing table modifications is enabled, there are some limitations with data testing.
For example, it is required that different source IP addresses for data testing are used. This means
that the host IP address or URL must be different for each test device.
Page 39
Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is required.
Select View | User Interface Properties and set Enable routing table modifications for
devices to No.
If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi (dual) data testing with one
measurement server, problems may be caused when several data connections are opened from one
host computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection
between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all data connections are routed via one terminal,
not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test results.
4.6
General guidelines for drive testing

Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no
slashes or cuts.
Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or
wrong attenuation of field strength.
Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as
possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from
each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.
Page 40
=c/f
c = 300E6 (m/s)
f = frequency (Hz)
450 MHz, = 66 cm
900 MHz, = 33 cm
1800 MHz, = 17 cm
Check the configuration before starting the measurement.
Band (MHz)
450
66 cm (26)
700
42 cm (18)
850
35 cm (14)
900
33 cm (13)
1800
17 cm (7)
1900
16 cm (6.3)
2100
14 cm (5.5)
2300
13 cm (5.1)
2500
12 cm (4.7)
2600
11 cm (4.3)
GPS (1565- 1575)
19 cm (7.5)
Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different
performance.
When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.
Page 41
Check the condition of all RF cables, and connectors: no tight curves, no slashes or cuts.
Check that RF connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of signals. Use the SMA torque wrench to tighten
the connectors
Minimum distance between antennas, at least one wavelength from the corners and roof
windows, and two wavelengths from each other
Individual antennas may have different performance. Therefore use only one antenna
type with all test devices
When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.
Any unused RF connectors in the RF-splitters must be terminated.
RF-splitters shall be used only for test UEs. If RF-splitters are used also with scanners,
separate RF-splitters must be used.
Main and MIMO RF cables of the same UE shall not be connected to the same RF-splitter
as it would disable the MIMO/diversity.
Page 42
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment
before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in
this initial configuration.
5.1
Configuring Nemo Outdoor

You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most
convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo
Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may
want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.
5.1.1
Configuration through Welcome page

1.
The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a firsttime user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on the
screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future
when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.
2.
With the Automatic device detection functionality, you can automatically add devices to
Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality
automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port
information.
Page 43
Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a
USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the dropdown menu.
Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may
need to configure the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to the
Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device
may also require additional configurations in its modem settings.
3.
You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below, start
them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button, or refresh the device
configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the
window. This is useful, e.g., when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.
4.
PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending PIN
code request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the PIN code.
After pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.
Page 44
5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.
6.
With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations.
This includes the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If you would like to
start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a
workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file
will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.
Page 45
7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting
and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Work Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices manually and activate
them. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement
system and click the Work Offline button
8.
The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement
with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace
for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.
Page 46
5.1.2
Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog

To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other in the Open a Device Configuration
field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.
1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a
workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a
workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.
Page 47
2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.
3.
If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting
and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the
Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the
measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to
activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work
Online button
4.
In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click
Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.
5.
Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or
remove devices button
in the Devices view. Choose the appropriate phone, scanner,
or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.

6.
All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application
detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.
7.
A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.
8.
Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the

Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings.
Set the appropriate parameters and click OK.
9.
Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager
(alt+M) to open the
User Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect
all devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the
measurements.
Page 48
5.1.3
Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually

If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and
select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |
Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you
can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.
In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a
previously added device and its assigned COM ports. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the
toolbar.
A dialog with a list of previously added devices appears. In the Label field you can type a name for
the device. Select the devices you want to add, define whether the device is in data mode or voice
quality mode, and click the Online or Offline button at the bottom of the dialog.
5.1.4
Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup

The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording
automatically when devices are connected and started.
In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations.
1.
Page 49
Go to View | User Interface Properties.
2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are
started and Start scripts automatically options to Yes.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace
As, and File | Save Device Configuration As.
5.
Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start
automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.
5.2
Configuring test mobiles

To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for data testing purposes, see the Device Configuration
Guide provided by Anite.
PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the
mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile.
Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out
measurements.
Page 50
5.3
Configuration Manager
Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager.
You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager
toolbar button
The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Select an item from the list and click the
Properties button
(if applicable) to edit the item.
The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.
Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to the
system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.
Page 51
5.3.1
Handler information
Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your
computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found in the Nemo Outdoor product
package. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must
have the corresponding handler installed.
5.3.2
User interface
Under the User Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the User Interface
Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.
Page 52
The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color
Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see User Interface Properties Colors). Clicking on
Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further
information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor. You can define the format in
which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see User
Interface Properties Presentation).
Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective MCC
and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA Operators
item in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button.
Enter the Operator name, MCC, and MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.
Page 53
5.3.2.1 User Interface Properties General
Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when
you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened
the next time you start the SW.
Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a
problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.
Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the
Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.
Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in
audio quality measurements also during playback.
When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the
Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.
Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to
exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button.
With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file will be
generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed.
When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device number is
included at the beginning of the notification audio alert.
With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when
Nemo Outdoor is started.
Page 54
With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware
configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is
loaded and started when Nemo Outdoor is started.
When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is generated
from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files. GPX is a lightweight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) between
applications and web services on the Internet.
5.3.2.2 User Interface Properties Measurement

By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the
Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting
all measurements.
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-monthday hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items
below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last
number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. You can also create
custom filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename Templates.
Page 55
%a
Abbreviated weekday name
%A
Full weekday name
%b
Abbreviated month name
%B
Full month name
%d
Day of month as decimal number (01 31)
%H
Hour in 24-hour format (00 23)
%I
%j
Day of year as decimal number (001 366)
%m
Month as decimal number (01 12)
%M
Minute as decimal number (00 59)
%n
Sequence number (1 )
%N
%p
Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S
Second as decimal number (00 59)
%U
Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53)
%w
Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)
%W
Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53)
%y
Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)
%Y
Year with century, as decimal number
%z
Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%Z
Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the
script file when you click the Start Recording button
in the main window.
With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile
to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay
in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active
state when toggling a script on and off.
Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If
attach/ detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is
suggested that radio off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach.
Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop
recording after the script is finished.
If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the
Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices
are finished before repeating the scripts.
Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the script
stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing.
With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of
the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.
Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start
measuring only after there is a GPS fix.
Page 56
Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause when
GPS velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds or the GPS position is stale (ie. coordinates do not
change). Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS velocity exceeds the user-specified
limit X.
GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This offset is
used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed.
Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped
during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.
Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions
from the device when the device is started.
When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the
ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call.
Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2 event.
By default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format specification
(Help | Nemo File Format) for more information on the events.
With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and
disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification
should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi
data testing, it can cause problems when several data connections are opened from one host
computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between
the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all connections are routed via one terminal, not via
different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.
Buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The
size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement.
Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo
Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline
mode to online mode.
Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test
calls after the measurement is ended.
Selecting the Show FTP send dialog before sending measurement to server option will
display the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before
the log files are sent to an FTP server. See chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more
information.
Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message
when the measurement has been paused.
With the Show Stop Recording Query dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a
dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.
Page 57
When the Show Enable Missing Neighbor Query dialog when recording is started option is
selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when
a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not
currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the
dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to
enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing
neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed
before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled.
Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor to
start recording automatically when a test call is received.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.
measurement files (.nmf)
binary files (.nbl)
packet capture files (.pcap)
marker files (.mrk)
indoor map files (.tab and image)
RF offset. In order to prevent measurements with missing/incorrect RF antenna connections, Nemo

Outdoor performs a check when measurement is started. The RXL/RSSI value of each measured
channel/carrier is read from each phone and scanner. The value from each channel is compared to
the highest value from all devices. If the measured value is less than X dB (=RF offset value) below
the highest value, a warning message is displayed to the user with the channel number and the
device name(s).
Select the Include packet capture logs in measurement file upload option to send packet
capture logs during measurement file upload.
5.3.2.3 Creating filename templates

You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes parameters
(tags) and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies the filename
format which defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can be exported and
imported.
Double-click the Filename item on the User Interface Properties Measurement page to open the
Filename Editor. Click the Add button to add a custom parameter.
Page 58
In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button
to add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and then
add a list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the Filename
Editor.
The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as needed.
In the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom parameters.
Below the Filename field you can see what the filename will look like with the selected parameters.
Page 59
When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This value
will be used in the filename.
Page 60
5.3.2.4 User Interface Properties Paths
In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the
default values. To change the default paths, click on the button and browse for a new location. In
the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file
is provided by Anite in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP
testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the
color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see
chapter Color Set Editor.
Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo
Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.
Page 61
Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.
5.3.2.5 User Interface Properties Presentation
In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are
presented. For example, to change the file size and buffer size unit in all data transfer configuration
dialogs, edit the Size setting in the User Interface Properties Presentation dialog.
Page 62
5.3.2.6 User Interface Properties Colors
In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first
eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes.
To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the
colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.
Page 63
5.3.3
Notifications
Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor
includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications
come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement
file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png
image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is
displayed in the Output window by default.
By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to,
for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.
Page 64
5.3.3.1 Notification Configuration

To make your own notifications, select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window
and double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. Alternatively select View |
Notification Manager.
The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the
selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a
notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.
Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use
the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface Properties
Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen to the file. If
you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the sound
files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo
Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female.
Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the
field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to
attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.
Page 65
Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.
Title defines a name for the notification.

Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You
can define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match consecutively
before the notification is triggered.
Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about
certain events only once.
Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Condition and Value
for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can
add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in
the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification.
The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you
can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button in
the Devices view to open the dialog.
Page 66
To activate a notification for a particular device, click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select
the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.
The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Select the
notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. The Notification Properties
button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings
(see chapter Notification Configuration for more information).
By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons, you can select and clear all items in the list.
To make user-configurable notifications:

1.
Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add.
2.
In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.
3.
In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and
bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the
notifications table.
4.
Page 67
Click OK to save the settings.
5.3.4
Scripts
Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be used
to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Select
the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of
these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script file to be used in a
measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view.
Creating Script files is described in more detail in chapter Making script files.
Page 68
5.3.5
Base station files
Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files. Select a BTS file to view
the BTS information in the Configuration Manager view. Click the button to remove the BTS file.
5.3.6
Page 69
Device configurations
Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device
configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use
the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to
detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.
You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can
load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device
Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor
and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and
type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device
Configurations folder.
To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager
and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.
5.3.7
Devices
Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note
that you can add a new device from the plus icon
and clicking on the minus icon
, and remove a device by selecting the device
. The table on the right displays information about the selected
device.
Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on the
device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented next.
Page 70
5.3.7.1 Device configuration for mobiles and modems
The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes
it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the
Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also
stored in the log file header.
Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Device
Configuration Guide for more detailed information.
Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter Kodiak
Push-to-Talk for more information.
Nemo Media Router option is used to enable Nemo Media Router. Select Automatic to enable the
option.
CS data connection option gives a list of all the circuit-switched data connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a connection here.
See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test
devices.
PS data connection option gives a list of all the packet-switched data connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a connection here.
See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test
devices.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Page 71
Antenna
type
Frequency
range
Antenna
gain
(dBd)
Impedance
VSWR 1
Max
power
Polarization
Cable
loss
Cable &
connector
1140.27
824
894/1710
1880/
0 dBd
50 ohm
2:1 @
specified
freq.
10 W
Linear
vertical
-0.55/
-0.82
dB/m
Mini Low
Loss 2.5
m, SMA
male
0 dBd
50 ohm
2:1 @
specified
freq.
10 W
Linear
vertical
18502170
MHz
1140.26
890
960/1850
1990/
17102170
MHz
Mini Low
Loss 2.5
m, SMA
male
Product Code
Antenna Model
Frequency Band
Antenna Gain [dBi]
Device
42101-06
MPLV1700
1700- 2700 MHz
4 dBi
PCTEL
R&S
421010-04
PCTEL MLPV OP178H
698-2300 MHz
PCTEL
R&S
421010-05
421010-07*
421010-08
Mobile Mark Mag.
694-894 MHz
MGRM-WLF-1C10
& 1700- 2700 MHz
3 dBi
Nemo FSR1
Mobile Mark Mag.
750-1250 MHz
MGRM-UMB-1C
3 dBi on 750-1250
MHz, 5 dBi on 16502700 MHz
Nemo FSR1
& 1650-2700 MHz
PCTEL OP178H
698-3000 MHz
3 dBi
PCTEL/ Nemo
FSR1
Test UEs
Test UEs
421022-25
PCTEL OP278H
698-3800 MHz
~1 dBi on 900-2100
MHz
PCTEL/ Nemo
FSR1
0dBi on 2300 MHz
Test UEs
~1dbi on 2600 MHz

~1.5dBi on 3500
MHz
Page 72
The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are
using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable
loss information from the manufacturer.
Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality
measurements.
If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select the
Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the
Advanced echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio with
both PESQ and POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license and it is
available with Nemo Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are not supported
with commercial sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44.
Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality
measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu.
Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements.
Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.
Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with an Invex isolation module for
voice quality measurements.
Select the VoIP only option to make voice quality measurements (POLQA) over a VoIP connection.
If you select this option make the appropriate settings in the VoIP Call Configuration dialog (see
VoIP calls).
Page 73
Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.
Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality
measurements. For more information, see chapter Streaming video quality testing.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement
Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the
menu bar.
5.3.7.2 Device configuration for scanners
In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.
Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed.
Page 74
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna
type
Frequency
range
Antenna
gain
(dBd)
Impedance
VSWR 1
Max
power
Polarization
Cable
loss
Cable &
connector
1140.27
824
894/1710
1880/
0 dBd
50 ohm
2:1 @
specifie
d freq.
10 W
Linear
vertical
-0.55/
-0.82
dB/m
Mini Low
Loss 2.5
m, SMA
male
0 dBd
50 ohm
2:1 @
specifie
d freq.
10 W
Linear
vertical
18502170
MHz
1140.26
890
960/1850
1990/
17102170
MHz
Mini Low
Loss 2.5
m, SMA
male
The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are
using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable
loss information from the manufacturer.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see Measurement Properties).
5.3.7.3 Device configuration for GPS receivers
In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.
Page 75
Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600.
Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values
for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value
for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver
documentation.
5.3.8
View groups
Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups
are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus
icon
, and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon
. When you
select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel displays the views that are
saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name.
See chapter View groups for more information on using the view groups.
5.4
Measurement Properties dialog

The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device
type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by the device.
Page 76
5.4.1
Measurement Properties General
Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that
Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name
yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The network
name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been
monitoring.
BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver
connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be
drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the button to browse for a
BTS file (.nbf or .csv).
Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from
which emergency call testing is possible.
Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the
device with AT-commands.
Page 77
5.4.2
Measurement Properties Measurement

On the Measurement Properties Measurement page you can define various measurement-related
settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data protocols are used,
and whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is device-specific.
5.4.2.1 Services
Voice Call opens the Voice Call dialog.
DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice
call.
Short Messaging Service. See chapter SMS testing for more information.
USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD testing for more
information on USSD testing.
Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See
chapter MMS testing for more information on MMS testing.
Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.
Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making video calls for
more information.
Packet Session opens the Packet session settings dialog.
Supported Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data
protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.
SIP Server option opens the SIP server dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information.
VoIP Call option opens the VoIP call dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information.
Page 78
Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test
terminals. The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click Send
Command. The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file.
Incoming call option opens the Incoming Call Configuration dialog. See chapter Receive call
for more information.
5.4.2.2 Measurement options

Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options such as
layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in
the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the
measurement device used. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the
device. These options are also accessible through the Devices view.
When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ)
tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA networks and other
codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented by 0.318MOS.
Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject, and
ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected.
Page 79
With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call method
is device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing. When a voice call
is terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the Trace interface call
method to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the Trace interface 2 call
method. Please check the Device Configuration Guide or release note for device-specific
information.
With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the
correct method must be selected to be able to make video call testing.
With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For
example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec
from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.
Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data
connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement
terminal.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the
Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This
file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and
decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.
5.4.2.3 Measurement settings

With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a GPRS detach is forced when
the measurement device enters idle mode.
Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm raw packet logging. When
diagnostics data logging is enabled, you can select individual Qualcomm trace messages to be
stored in a separate binary file (.NBL). Both NBL and NMF files can be opened and played back with
Nemo Outdoor and Qualcomm raw data messages can be fully decoced in the grid view for further
analysis. This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option OD0700-00.
Page 80
Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated
during a normal drive test.
Currently, the following diagnostic messages are available:
Page 81
DCI Information report
DL Transport block
LL1 PUSCH Tx Report
LTE MAC UL Transport block
MAC UL transport block
MAC UL Tx stat
PDCP UL stat
PUCCH TX report
RLC DL ALL PDU
LTE ML1 random access request (MSG1) report
LTE ML1 random access response (MSG2) report
LTE ML1 UE identification message (MSG3) report
LTE ML1 contention resolution message (MSG4) report
LTE RLC DL AM All PDU
LTE RLC UL AM All PDU
LTE ML1 PDCCH-PHICH indication report
LTE ML1 uplink packet build indication
LTE ML1 PDSCH stat indication
LTE LL1 PUCCH CSF Log
LTE LL1 PUSCH CSF log
LTE LL1 PDSCH decoding results
5.4.3
Measurement Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports frequency scanning.
Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the
mobile.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With
Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900
and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators.
Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC
threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a
grid view.
Page 82
If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button
to define the channels to be scanned.
Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz.
In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the
Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be
viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.
The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to
the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply
double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning,
click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers
in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected, you have the
possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is
selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from
current band.
Page 83
If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.
In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which
the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the
Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to
clear the table.
Page 84
5.4.4
Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports pilot scanning.
The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.
Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH
RSCP above the set value.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the
possibility to benchmark different operators.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a
grid view.
Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.
5.4.5
Measurement Properties Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with

scanners
Please refer to the separate scanner guides, Nemo FSR1 User Manual and Nemo Scanner Guide,
included in the product package.
Page 85
5.4.6
Measurement Properties - Script

In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Settings button
in
the Devices window and select Script Properties.
In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script
files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see chapter Making script
files).
With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same
group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By
default the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups by
selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new
script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use
script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface
Properties (see User Interface Properties Measurement).
When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all
script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.
Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality
terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script
files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are
synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The
script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.
Page 86
DURING MEASUREMENTS
When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process in
a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. In
the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples
are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see
chapter Troubleshooting.
6.1
Textual notes
It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements. Click the Add Textual
Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start recording before the button is activated.
Page 87
You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new
predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add
predefined text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top.
The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.
6.2
Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/

Invex
Nemo Outdoor measurement units can be remotely configured and controlled with Nemo
Commander. This requires the Remote option in Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex and the Nemo
Commander SW. All the same user interface functionalities are available in remote mode as in
normal mode. For more information on the Nemo Commander SW, please refer to the Nemo
Commander user manual.
In order to use TeamViewer for controlling the Nemo Outdoor units, the TeamViewer application
must be installed on the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Please refer to the Nemo Commander user manual
To configure the Remote mode, select Remote | Settings.
Note that if the Remote menu does not appear in the menu bar, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not have the Remote option (product code OD0700-01).
On the User Interface Properties Remote page, select Yes for Enable remote mode. When
Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a maintenance session at
startup. Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote menu.
Page 88
Define the Driver name and Driver phone number (optional).
6.2.1
Nemo Commander server options

FTP protocol is used to transfer data between field units and Nemo Commander. Commander Server
options define the server (FTP) address, username, and password.
Page 89
Add the FTP server host name or IP address.
Leave Username, Remote folder, and Password fields empty. This information is
generated by the system and the fields are updated after the initial maintenance session.
Use secure protocol: Select in case SFTP protocols is used in the server
Use passive mode: With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection
6.2.2
Initial field unit configuration

1.
Build the Nemo Outdoor HW configuration, in other words, connect the measurement
devices (phones, USB modems, and scanners) to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.
2.
A dedicated PS data connection (e.g. 3G/4G USB modem or smartphone, active only during
maintenance sessions) is required to establish the connection between Nemo Outdoor and
Nemo Commander. Connect the device to the Nemo Outdoor laptop and install the
necessary drivers. Do not add the device to Nemo Outdoor as it will not be used as a
measurement device.
3.
Synchronize date and time settings between the Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander
computers.
4.
Enable the Remote mode on the Nemo Outdoor User Interface Properties Remote
page and define the Commander Server settings.
6.2.3
Page 90
5.
Select Maintenance from the Remote menu.
The Nemo Outdoor unit connects and registers to Nemo Commander.
The HW configuration of the Nemo Outdoor unit is uploaded to Nemo Commander.
Step 5, Maintenance, must be repeated every time the HW configuration changes.
Measurement workflow
1.
Nemo Commander: Define measurement sessions for the field unit(s)
Scripts for each device
Session start/stop time
2.
Nemo Outdoor: Power on laptop and all test devices
Nemo Outdoor starts automatically
6.2.4
Status report is uploaded to Nemo Commander
Measurement session is downloaded from Nemo Commander
Measurements are started automatically according to the downloaded configuration
Periodic status reports are sent to Nemo Commander (configured in Nemo Commander)
3.
Nemo Commander: Verify the HW configuration from latest status report (optional)
If incorrect, contact driver
4.
Nemo Outdoor: End measurements
Measurements are stopped at the scheduled time
Log files and status reports are uploaded to Nemo Commander
Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander

The following measurement events are reported by Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex to Nemo
Commander.
Status events:
Start measurement
Stop measurement
GSP fix lost
GSP fix acquired
Device responding
Device power off request
Device restart
High voltage shutdown
Battery operation
Battery shutdown
Errors:
Start measurement failed
Device not responding
Warnings:
Page 91
Low voltage
High voltage
Battery voltage low
6.3
Making scanning measurements
6.3.1
With a scanner
In order to measure with a scanner, just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording
button. Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file.
6.3.2
With a mobile
To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone, first make sure that the terminal model
supports the scanning feature.
To do frequency scanning, select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning, or
Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning.
To end a scanning measurement, select Measurement control | Stop Scanning.
6.4
Making voice calls

To make voice calls:
1.
In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties

Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice
Call field. Click OK.
2.
Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu
or from the Measurement
menu.
Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button.
Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop
Scripts button.
3.
When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the Device
Commands menu
Page 92
. If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.
6.4.1
Voice Call Configuration

Voice call settings are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements.
Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog and the Voice
Call Configuration dialog will be opened.
Phone number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number
must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is
transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.
Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is
from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the
value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.
Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by specifying
the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be randomly selected between
the specified values during measurements.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt
Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires
Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
Page 93
When Wait for call connection option is selected, a call script will move on to the next command
after receiving the CAA event after a voice call has been made. When the option is not selected, the
script will move on to the next command after a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is
received).
Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two
devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server.
Select the Nemo Server option to enable voice call synchronization between a device and Nemo
Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define
connection settings.
Select the Local device options to activate end-to-end voice calls between two devices connected
to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
Own number defines the A-party phone number.
Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not received
within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause Incoming call not received is written to the
log file.
Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length
a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix
is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision
but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold
value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.
Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note
that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.
Page 94
6.4.1.1 Configuring manual end-to-end voice calls

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
1.
Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B
2.
Open the Voice Call Properties for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in the
Devices view.
Page 95
3.
Enter Device B phone number in the Number field.
4.
Select the Enable end-to-end call option.
5.
Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.
6.
You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.
6.4.1.2 HTTPS Options dialog

In the HTTPS Options dialog you can define the connection settings for the Nemo Server.
Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
Page 96
6.4.2
Voice Call Properties TETRA

Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile.
Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Click the Voice Number Properties
button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.
Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be
such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on
the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.
Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. There are five different options in TETRA
networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and PSTN.
Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time
Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by
pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button
Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen,
and by pressing the PTT button, also speak
Page 97
Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button
PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from
the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that
the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay
Between Call Attempts parameter.
6.4.3
Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing

Nemo Outdoor supports QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT)
technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the phone
when used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in Nemo
Outdoor.
Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different states of
PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to VCHI event.
Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are recorded and
decoded with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in Nemo Outdoor and
require a license option.
Page 98
6.4.3.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk

Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device has
been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth Devices
dialog.
Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the Device
Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT port field and
click OK.
In the Measurement Properties Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to open
the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.
Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and
group call.
Page 99
Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the contact list of
the Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to make a
call to the first contact on the contact list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to many, define
several recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the selected call type is
group call, select the recipient from the group contact list of the Kodiak application and again, use
the index number.
After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Register Kodiak Server to login to the
Kodiak server.
After you have registered to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.
Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.
Page 100
From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.
In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties Measurement and doubleclick the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click Send
Message.
6.5
Voice quality measurements

Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality
measurements. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete instructions on
setting up and making voice quality measurements.
Page 101
6.6
Making video calls

Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access the
Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.
Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.94 VoLTE option is required for video over LTE testing.
Number defines the number where the video call will be made.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires
Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality
settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the
a maximum of 30 seconds.
Page 102
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note
that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.
Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to
be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement, and
select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.
Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that
works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.
Method 1 - Samsung Z105
Method 2 - Samsung Z107
Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung
ZX20
Method 4 - Samsung ZV10
Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700
Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal
keypad)
Page 103
Method 9 - Samsung G800
Method 10 - Not used
To make video calls:

1.
In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you
wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.
2.
Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu
or from the Measurement
menu.
Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button.
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop
Scripts button.
3.
When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are
running a script, wait until the script is finished.
Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call capable terminal based on
Qualcomm chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from
Measurement Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected method is
saved to the device configuration file.
Terminals verified by Anite Network Testing support video calls. However, video call
testing with Android-based devices is not supported.
6.7
Data transfers
With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have
several data protocol options for making data transfers.
The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer
needs to be set up and configured individually.
Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple
concurrent data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then select
Start New Data Transfer and the desired protocol.
Page 104
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data
measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file
will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the
measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture
information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.
6.7.1
Configuring the data connection

Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that
is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.
If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS data
transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.
6.7.1.1 Data Call Properties dialog

Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data
Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view.
There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS and
CDMA views just have fewer parameters.
Number defines the number of the server.

Username refers to the server username.
Password refers to the server password.
Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data
call.
Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.
Page 105
Modem type refers to the modem type that the server is using. The alternatives are Analog (v.34)
and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).
Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.
Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.
Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link
Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best
channel coding.
6.7.1.2 Packet session settings

Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-click
the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.
Page 106
All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to
make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.
6.7.1.3 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)
Note that it is required that Nemo Server is used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf
service is slightly modified for optimal performance.
Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP
(IPerf) items in the Devices view.
Page 107
Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over
an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.
Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.
Note that Firewall should be turned off.

Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
5001.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection
attempt will fail.
Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
6015.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.
Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer
attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be
stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0
to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too
small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the
retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window
size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with
category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid
reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730
kbit = 91.25 kB.
Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):
Page 108
Max. throughput
~RTT (ms)
TCP window size

(kbit)
TCP window size (kB)
64 kbps (GPRS/
EDGE)
600
38.4
4.8
128 kbps (GPRS/

EDGE)
600
76.8
9.6
256 kbps (GPRS/

EDGE)
600
153.6
19.2
384kbps (Rel. 99)
200
76.8
9.6
HSDPA 1.8Mbps
UE category 3 & 4
100
180
22.5
HSDPA 3.6Mbps
UE category 5 & 6
100
360
45
Max. throughput
~RTT (ms)
TCP window size

(kbit)
TCP window size (kB)
HSDPA 7.3Mbps
UE category 7 & 8
100
730
91.25
HSDPA 10.2Mbps
UE category 9
100
1020
127.5
HSDPA 14.4Mbps
UE category 9
100
1440
180
TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not
guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower
layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example,
if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s,
there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit
successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the
maximum throughput that is not normally desired.
UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower
layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it
should be avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP
and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of
smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than
maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram
size is 1,460 bytes.
Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers.
Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.
Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer
finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data
packages is defined in the Packet Size field.
Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties
dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer
data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has
been transferred. It is not limited by time.
Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties
button.
Page 109
6.7.2
Configuring the FTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server
opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some
firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data
transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection.
If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer
where you are running Nemo Outdoor.
To set up data measurements using FTP:

1.
Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement
devices.
2.
Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see

Measurement Properties Measurement)
3.
Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
session settings).
4.
Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5.
Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6.
After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data
transfers).
Page 110
6.7.2.1 FTP Transfer Properties dialog

Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.
Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.
on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.
Port refers to the port used by the FTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server.
Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the
data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode.
attempt will fail.
Page 111
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer
will fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
FTP session.
Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For
example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo
Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer
sessions are started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a
fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is
not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from
the beginning.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving
data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.
Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data,
this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these
files is defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Page 112
6.7.3
Configuring the SFTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server
opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some
firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data
transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection.
To set up data measurements using SFTP:

1.
Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5.
6.
transfers).
Page 113
6.7.3.1 SFTP Transfer Properties dialog

Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.
Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.
Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.
attempt will fail.
Page 114

will fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
SFTP session.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.
functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
6.7.4
Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol

The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP(S) protocol and this data
transfer is measured.
To set up data measurements using HTTP(S):

1.
Page 115
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.
5.
6.
transfers).
6.7.4.1 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog

Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view.
The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.
In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.
Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Page 116
attempt will fail.
Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the username and password for the
authentication.
Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options:
POST and PUT.
will fail.
Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time
stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If
you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer, type the
port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.
without NMR, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you
can use the same URL for all of them.
To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See chapter Making
script files for instructions on making scripts.
Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is by
default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the http://useragents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-user_agent_types.php for
further details about user agents.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.
Page 117
6.7.5
Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol

The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through
the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the user
selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is
measured.
If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page
downloading time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically detect
settings and Proxy server.
To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol:

1.
2.

Measurement Properties Measurement).
3.
session settings).
4.
Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.
5.
6.
transfers).
Page 118
6.7.5.1 Browser Transfer Properties dialog

Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the
Devices view.
URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an
IPv4 connection.
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
Select or clear the Display browser window option to display/hide the browser window during the
data transfer.
If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are
written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.
In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for identifying
the user agent.
The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the
whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and RLC layer
data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data
throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active
(PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or
calculated with Nemo Analyze
For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be
used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as each
connection must have its own IP address (does not apply when NMR is used).
Page 119
6.7.6
Configuring the POP3 protocol

POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.
To set up data measurements using POP3:

1.
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings POP3 dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.
5.
6.
transfers).
6.7.6.1 E-Mail Settings POP3 dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.
POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.
Page 120
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
attempt will fail.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
will fail.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.
6.7.7
Configuring the SMTP protocol

Page 121
To set up data measurements using SMTP:

1.
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings SMTP dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.
5.
6.

transfers).
6.7.7.1 E-Mail Settings SMTP dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.
SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have
its own IP address.
Page 122
Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own.
Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators'
SIM cards.
Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.
attempt will fail.
will fail.
Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to
open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message.
Page 123
6.7.7.2 E-Mail Editor dialog

Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.
New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.
Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail
messages.
Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.
Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.
Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.
6.7.8
Configuring the IMAP protocol

Page 124
To set up data measurements using IMAP:

1.
2.

Measurement Properties Measurement).
3.
session settings).
4.
Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings IMAP dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.
5.
6.
transfers).
6.7.8.1 E-Mail Settings IMAP dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.
IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have
its own IP address.
Port refers to the port used by the server.
Page 125
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the server.
attempt will fail.
IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
will fail.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.
6.7.9
Configuring the WAP protocol

The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP
protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is
measured.
To set up data measurements using WAP:

1.
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
Page 126
Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog.
5.
6.
transfers).
6.7.9.1 WAP Transfer Properties dialog

Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view.
WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements.
WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have
multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.
attempt will fail.
will fail.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you
must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.
same URL can be used.
To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several WAP transfers. See chapter Making
script files for instructions on making scripts.
Page 127
Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.
6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol
Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor
must be installed and IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP packet
capturing for more information.
The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the
streaming testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol
and this data transfer is measured.
In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can download VLC from
Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com (Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and
Other Devices) or from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.
With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed on the
computer. You can download RealPlayer 11 from Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com
(Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other Devices).
To set up data measurements using streaming:

1.
Install VLC.
2.
Install Microsoft Network Monitor.
3.
measurement mobile.
4.
Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties Measurement dialog.

Also define the test files that are used in the measurement.
5.
session settings).
6.
Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).
7.
8.
transfers).
6.7.10.1
Streaming Properties dialog
Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices
view.
Page 128
Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not installed
on the computer. You can download a free player from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.
URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example,
rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one file
will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, you
must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive
downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. See chapter Making script files for
instructions on making scripts. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
attempt will fail.
will fail.
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.
Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.
Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements with PVI.
6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol

By conducting trace route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to
the target server.
Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The
ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also
possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case
the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible
to show the location right before the host that is not responding.
Page 129
To set up data measurements using the trace route protocol:

1.
2.

3.
session settings).
4.
See below how to define Trace Route properties.
5.
6.
transfers).
6.7.11.1
Trace Route Properties dialog
Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices
view.
The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route
measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just
make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.
Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals,
each connection must be given its own, separate IP address!
same IP address can be used!
Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.
HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
Page 130
HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target
server.
By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by
Nemo Outdoor.
6.7.12 Making data transfers

After you have configured the data connection and selected and configured the data protocol, you
can start making the data transfers.
Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.
To make data transfers:

1.
Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button.
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts
button.
2.
To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view
and select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and connection established.
3.
To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view
and select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP
context and make the GPRS attach.
4.
Page 131
To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.
6.8
Streaming video quality testing

Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the
network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports PVI and
PEVQ-S streaming video quality testing. A video preview can be seen during the measurement in
Nemo Outdoor.
Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements.

Before starting video streaming quality measurements, select the video quality algorithm used,
PEVQ-S or PVI, from the Device Configuration Voice/Video quality page.
In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will need to
install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in the
PEVQ-S dialog. WinPCAP and Flash Player are available in the Nemo product package and Nemo
User Club or you can download them from the product websites.
In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PVI, you will need to
install VLC 2.0.6 or newer on the computer and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming
Properties dialog. VLC is available in the Nemo product package and Nemo User Club or you can
download it from the product website.
Page 132
PVI video quality parameters are not available with 64-bit operating systems. PVI
streaming without video quality parameters is supported with both 32- and 64-bit
operating systems.
Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S:

1.
Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player are installed on the computer.
2.
Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration Voice/video quality page.
3.
Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.
4.
Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button
. From the Measurement menu,
select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test
devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with
just one device.
5.
You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line
graph (Data | Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video
Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected
parameter.
6.
From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer
or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.
Making streaming video quality measurements with PVI:

1.
Check that VLC is installed on the computer.
2.
Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog.
3.
select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test
devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with
just one device.
4.
You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line
graph (Data | Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video
Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected
parameter.
5.
From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer
or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.
Page 133
6.8.1
PEVQ-S Properties dialog

When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to
define some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.
Video offers a selection of preloaded videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded
videos can be used for testing. The videos must be stored in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files. To
update the video files from the Opticom server, click the Update button.
transfer will fail.
Select or clear the Display video stream option to display/hide the video stream window during
the data transfer.
The dialog also displays some information about the network adapters recognized by Nemo
Outdoor. If there are problems with PEVQ-S testing, check that your device appears on the list. If
not, restart the laptop and the adapter should appear on the list.
Page 134
6.9
VoIP calls
With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a user is able to perform IP telephony
measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions.
In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will need to install a SIP server. Nemo
Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information on installing
the Asterisk SIP server, login to http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx
Page 135
To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the
SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configuration dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by
double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view.
Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi.

Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060.
Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the
corresponding password.
Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server.
Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid.
Automatic registration, when selected, automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as
soon as Packet Session has been created).
When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy.
Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.
Page 136
Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices
view.
SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver.
Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The
order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making
a call to a counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing
call is G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case
of an incoming call.
Select the Voice quality option to enable voice quality measurements for VoIP calls. Please note
that this option is available after you have selected the VoIP only option from the Device
configuration for mobiles and modems dialog.
Reference sample filename refers to the file used as the reference sample in the voice quality
measurements. Click the Browse button to select a file.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received sample files on the laptop.
With the Prefix for received sample files option you can define a prefex that will be added to the
filename of all received sample files.
With the Save only samples below threshold option you choose to save only those samples that
are below a user-definable threshold (MOS score).
Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.
Page 137
Making VoIP measurements:

1.
Define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations.
2.
To start packet session, click on the Measurement control button
| Start Packet
Session.
3.
To register SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server.
4.
To start VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call.
5.
To end VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call.
6.
Finally, to unregister SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP
Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without unregistering)
6.10 Application testing

Nemo Outdoor offers several application testing features.
6.10.1 Facebook testing

In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook account.
To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the Facebook
Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Facebook testing.
Page 138
If you already have a Facebook account, type in the Username. The username can be found from
the General Account Settings in Facebook.
transfer will fail.
User access token is required for Facebook testing. Enter the username and click the Get Access
Token button. You will be redirected to the Facebook login page. Enter your account information
and select the Keep me logged in to option. Click Log In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and
an access token will appear in the field.
Application ID and Application access token fields are required only if you have your own
application for accessing Facebook. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty and the Nemo Fabo
application will be used by default.
Page 139
When performing Facebook testing with multiple devices, use the same Facebook account
on all of them. With Nemo Invex II, use different UICs for the data connections and then
you can use individual Facebook accounts for each of them.
You can define a Photo that will be uploaded on the wall of your Facebook profile.
Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption for
a photo.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved
from the wall when the user executes the Get Wall Feed command.
After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The following
information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time elapsed, and amount
of data received/sent.
Get friend list will download the friend list from you Facebook account.
Get wall feed will download the wall feed from you Facebook account. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Facebook Configuration dialog.
Please note that Facebook has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Facebook Help Center for current information about the limits.
Post status update will upload the text typed in the Comment field and post it on the wall of your
Facebook profile.
Post photo will upload the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the text typed
in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.
Page 140
6.10.2 Twitter testing

In order to be able to test the Twitter application, you will need to set up a Twitter account.
To start running Twitter tests, you will need to define some settings in the Twitter Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Twitter item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Twitter item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not support Twitter testing.
Page 141
If you want to follow the Twitter feed of a specific user or a hashtag, type in the username/hashtag
in the @User/#Feed field without the @ or # symbols.
transfer will fail.
Page 142
User access token and User access token secret are required for Twitter testing. Click the Get
Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Twitter login page.
Enter your account information and select the Remember me option. Click Sign In. You will return
to Nemo Outdoor and the access token and access token secret will appear in the field.
Application access token and Application access token secret fields are required only if you
have your own application for accessing Twitter. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.
You can define an Image that will be uploaded to your Twitter feed.
Comment is text that will be posted as a tweet.
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.
Please note that Twitter has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Twitter Help Center for current information about the limits.
Page 143
After defining Twitter settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Twitter and then one of the
Twitter-related commands.
Get User Feed will download your own Twitter feed.

Load Profile will download the Twitter feed from the selected user (defined in the Twitter
Configuration dialog, @User / #Feed field).
Follow Feed will download the feed from the selected Twitter hashtag. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Twitter Configuration dialog.
Post Feed will upload the text typed in the Twitter Configuration dialog, Comment field and
post it on your Twitter feed.
Post Image will upload the image selected in the Twitter Configuration dialog on your Twitter
feed.
Page 144
You can follow Twitter-related statistics in a grid.
6.10.3 Instagram testing

In order to be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up an Instagram account.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Instagram Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Instagram item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Instagram item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Instagram testing.
Page 145
If you already have an Instagram account, type in the Username.

transfer will fail.
User access token is required for Instagram testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Instagram login page. Enter your account information and click Log In. You
will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.
Application ID and Application secret fields are required only if you have your own application
for accessing Instagram. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.
Searchable tag/username defines a tag or a username from which the feed will be downloaded.
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.
Page 146
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Instagram and then one of
the Instagram-related commands.
Get User Feed will download the Instagram feed of a selected user.
Get Self Feed will download your own Instagram feed.
Get Popular Feed will download the popular feed from Instagram.
Search Media with a Tag will download the feed from the selected hashtag (defined in the
Instagram Configuration dialog). The amount of data downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed
retrieval setting in the Instagram Configuration dialog.
You can follow Instagram-related statistics in a grid.
Page 147
6.10.4 Dropbox testing

In order to be able to test the Dropbox application, you will need to set up a Dropbox account.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Dropbox Configuration dialog.
Open the dialog by double-clicking the Dropbox item in the Devices view.
Please note that if the Dropbox item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Dropbox testing.
Page 148
User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.
Application access token is required only if you have your own application for accessing Dropbox.
Otherwise you can leave this field empty.
transfer will fail.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the Dropbox server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.
Page 149
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Dropbox. Nemo Outdoor
will perform the Dropbox data transfer.
You can follow Dropbox-related statistics in a grid.
Page 150
6.11 SMS testing

SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the
SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.
Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.92 VoLTE option is required for SMS over LTE testing. In
addition, if you are using the Samsung IMS, you will need the Samsung IMS IR.92 VoLTE
option.
Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter
the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567.
Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the
messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.
When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is
added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is
added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it
took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.
All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.
Page 151
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000
characters.
Making SMS testing measurements:
Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you
must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that
Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again.
1.
Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where
you are sending the test SMS message.
2.
Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test
SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.
3.
Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is
terminated.
4.
Type in the test message and click OK.
5.
select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device
name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will
send the test SMS.
6.
You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties
dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all
selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now
display only the selected SMS testing-related events.
6.11.1 SMS testing with CDMA terminals

SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the
terminal. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing are
Huawei C7600
LG C680
LG C676
LG KX206
LG KX256
LG VX8100
LG VX8350
LG VX8360
Samsung SCH A870
The testing goes as follows:

1.
Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor.
2.
Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, send an SMS to the target phone number
from the phones keypad.
Page 152
3.
In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button
and select Send SMS
Message. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual
phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phones Saved messages folder.
6.12 MMS testing

MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS
messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS
messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling
statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also
separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message
sending/receiving are recorded.
In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings
in the Packet Session Settings dialog.
Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.
If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter
MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.
Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not
contain a PDP activation command.
6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS

Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging
Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default.
Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the
parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific.
You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator
of the network that you are measuring.
Page 153
6.12.1.1
MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.
MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated.
Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.
Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.
Page 154
6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog

Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.
New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.
Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages.
Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.
Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.
Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.
6.12.3 Making MMS measurements

Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.
You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.
Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.
If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter
MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.
Making MMS measurements:
Page 155
1.
Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet session settings for MMS).
2.
Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.
3.
If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (see
Making script files).
4.
If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS
Message from the Measurement control
menu or from the Measurement menu.
Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS.

5.
If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This
will start the measurement.
6.
selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. The grid will
now display only the selected MMS testing-related events.
6.12.4 MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121

You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can
use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.
Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:
Page 156
1.
On the phone main window, press Messaging.
2.
In the Messaging view, press Options.
Page 157
3.
From the menu, select Settings.
4.
From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.
5.
Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.
6.
Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.
7.
Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the
phone, or by selecting Options| Change| No.
8.
Page 158
Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.
9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes
to No.
10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.
Page 159
6.13 USSD testing

USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network. Open the
USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices view.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD messages is
182 characters.
Sending USSD messages:

1.
Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending attempt is
terminated.
2.
Page 160
Type in the test message and click OK.
3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button
. In the Devices view, click the
Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD message
with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.
4.
selections and select the USSD item and click OK. The grid will now display only the
selected USSD message testing-related events.
6.14 Start external application

This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the
automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line
parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement servers
(UICs).
The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are
not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not
currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP
data throughput parameter.
The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to
the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to
minimum from the browser settings.
The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select
Start External Application from the menu.
Page 161
Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making
measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For
example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.
Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local
computer. If you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo
Invex), check the path from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in
the path manually.
If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external
application is closed.
Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is
started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL
(http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no
spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field.
Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example,
C:\Temp.
6.15 ICMP Ping

The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping
measurements simultaneously with data transfers.
Page 162
Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You
can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to
the ping.
Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines
the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that
the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.
Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the
server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout
parameter
(=-1).
Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the
delay will occur. The options are:
Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before
sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent
immediately after the reply.
Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.
Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping
measurement is repeated.
Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until
you stop it manually.
Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 1 s. New request is sent
every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every
1000ms.
Page 163
Ping reply
Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 50ms. New request is
sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent
every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.
Ping reply
To make ping measurements:

1.
Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view.
2.
Define the required ping parameters and click OK.
3.
Click the Start Recording button
4.
In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button
.
and select Start
Packet Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says PDP Context
Activated.
5.
From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping
until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping
measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.
6.16 Indoor mode

Nemo Outdoor indoor mode should be used when making measurements indoors. The mode is
activated by clicking the
button in the toolbar or by selecting Indoor Mode from the
Measurement menu.
When the indoor mode is activated the functionality of Nemo Outdoor changes:
To start measuring an Indoor window needs to be open and a floorplan loaded.
When the measurement is started, the user is prompted to select the starting position in
the Indoor window. The selected location is used to automatically create the first marker.
Measurement archive compression is enabled automatically, in other words, the files below
are compressed into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are
compressed, the original files are deleted.
Page 164
binary files (.nbl)
marker files (.mrk)
The floorplan file or the current floor layer cannot be changed during measurements to
prevent mismatch during post-processing.
Information about the current mode (Indoor/Outdoor) is written to the measurement file
header.
6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps

Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. The
supported indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps (.kmz).
Please refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. To view measurement data
on KMZ maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to Google Earth Files (.kmz).
Select a map file and click Open. KMZ and MapInfo maps have the same functionalities. For more
information on iBwave files, please see chapter iBwave maps.
It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click
on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be
opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter
you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.
To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement
file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click
on Move and select a new destination for the marker.
Page 165
On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the
measurement and walking around in the building, use markers to draw the measurement route on
the floor plan. Markers are added by clicking the Add marker and Add marker on GPS position
buttons in the Indoor map toolbar.
Select the Add marker tool and click on the map. The marker will be placed in the selected
location. The Add marker on GPS position tool can be used only when measuring in Indoor mode
with a georeferenced floorplan and valid GPS coordinates. The marker will be placed in the current
location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You
can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem
areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.
Page 166
6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files

You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. DAS and small cell BTS types are also supported.
Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File button and browse for a BTS file.
After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.
Page 167
The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is
drawn from the test device to the serving base station.
Page 168
6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans

You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the
side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.
The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default
color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the
color legends in the Color legends side panel.
You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the
Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on
the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go
Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.
Page 169
6.16.4 Indoor route planning

Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You
can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar, and
clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also
activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later
use by clicking on the Save Route Plan
icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map
popup menu.
The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor
maps. See chapter Route plans for more information.
Page 170
6.16.5 iBwave maps

iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation on how
to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor. iBwave files may contain UTM
coordinates in addition to WGS84 coordinates. Nemo Outdoor supports both coordinate formats
when loading transmitter files. Please note that both the tab file and the transmitter file must use
the same coordinate system.
To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to
iBwave Design Files. Select an iBwave map file and click Open.
If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.
Page 171
The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the view
between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the BTS files
for each floor.
Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor. Therefore,
when making measurements on several floors, it is advised to make a separate log file for each
floor and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name. Alternatively, you
can add a textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question. This way you will be
able to place the measurement route on the correct floor when playing back the log file.
6.16.5.1
BTS files on iBwave maps
You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS sites but
you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with matching cell
IDs than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and antenna directions will
not be displayed.
Page 172
First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.
Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.
Page 173
The BTS file appears in the Layers panel but to make it appear on the map, you will need to
associate it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and select
Properties.
On the Linked BTS page, select the file that you opened on the map and click OK.
Page 174
The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.
6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis

With DAS anomaly analysis, user can check and verify in-building small cells and DAS (Distributed
Antenna Systems) antennas giving simple pass, fail, or untested results for each cell.
Indoor small cell antennas and transmitters can be displayed on the indoor map with iBwave indoor
plans and Nemo BTS files (.nbf). DAS anomaly analysis is enabled from BTS Properties.
Enable DAS anomaly analysis by selecting a device in the field.

Cell test radius in meters defines how close the marker needs to be to the cell in order to perform
the DAS anomaly analysis.
Page 175
Cell transparency defines how the circle is drawn. 0% is almost solid color and 100% is
transparent.
Signal level limits (dBm) defines the pass/fail limit for signal level for each system. If the signal
level is above the defined limit, the test result is passed and if the signal level is below the limit, the
test result is failed.
Cell search mode defines on which sites the test is performed.
Full: Requires that the BTS file contains the system, channel number, and scrambling code
information.
System and channel: Requires that the BTS file contains the system and channel number
information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include
the correct cell type information.
System: Requires that the BTS file contains the system information. Use this option with
iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type information.
When the analysis is enabled, a circle is drawn around DAS and small cell cells. The color of the
circle depends on the cell test status:
Untested = gray
Failed = red
Passed = green
Whenever a marker is placed within the test radius of the serving cell location, the current signal
level of the serving cell is checked. If the signal level exceeds the defined limit (signal level limit
defined in the BTS Properties dialog), the cell is considered as passed (green) and if the signal level
is below the configured limit, the cell is considered as failed (red).
Page 176
The same analysis is also performed during playback mode if the DAS anomaly analysis is enabled.
In addition to the map view, a DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each cell.
The results view can be displayed/hidden from the indoor map popup menu.
6.16.7 RF ingress analysis

RF ingress analysis calculates distributions related to indoor (small cell and DAS) vs outdoor
(macro) cell coverage and gives real-time information of detected RF ingress. The analysis is based
on the cell type information read from the BTS file (.nbf). A cell is considered to be indoor or small
cell if the cell type in the BTS file is SMALL_CELL or DAS, otherwise the cell type is macro cell.
Please note that a BTS file must be set for all devices before RF ingress measurement is
started. If a BTS file has not been selected, all cells will be considered as macro cells and
the statistics calculated will be incorrect.
The signal strength comparison is done for each system and the comparison is performed for
serving, neighbor, detected, listed and monitored cells in each system.
LTE: RSRP
UMTS: RSCP
GSM: RXL Sub/RXL full (neighbor set)
CDMA: RSCP
You can also plot RF ingress on a map using the colorset Cell type (RF Ingress).
Page 177
6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu

Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of
the map.
Page 178
6.16.8.1
Custom Window Properties dialog
In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.
6.16.8.2
Custom window - Save changes
Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.16.8.3
Custom window - Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.
The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom
window and define the custom window groups.
6.16.8.4
Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format. See chapter CSV
file export for more information.
6.16.8.5
Save as - Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.
6.16.8.6
Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See
chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.
Page 179
6.16.8.7
Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See
chapter View groups for more information on view groups.
6.16.8.8
Open map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.16.8.9
Save map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.
6.16.8.10
Import map
You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click the
Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the Data | Indoor menu. Select
an image file and click Open. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.
In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to georegister the image file
or enter the exact dimensions of the map area.
Page 180
To use georegistration, select Georegister and click OK. The image file will appear on the
Georegister Image map as a transparent box.
Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right
spot on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into an
arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the map. To
move the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor changes into
an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the coordinates.
6.16.8.11
Route plan - Create
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map
window, after which you can save the route plan.
6.16.8.12
Route plan - Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.
6.16.8.13
Route plan - Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.
Page 181
6.16.8.14
Save as MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See
chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.
6.16.8.15
Add waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
6.16.8.16
Tool
The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the
Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes
the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the
map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom
In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and
out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the
map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during
playback.
6.16.8.17
Center on new marker
The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker when
it is inserted.
6.16.8.18
Auto center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo pans the map so that the current location will stay on the
visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center
command is selected.
6.16.8.19
View entire map
The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.
6.16.8.20
View entire route
The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.
6.16.8.21
Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the
text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select
Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.
Page 182
6.16.8.22
Add site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
6.16.8.23
Color legends
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.
6.16.8.24
DAS anomaly analysis results
When perfoming DAS anomaly analysis, the DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results
for each cell. This command hides/displays the results view.
6.16.8.25
Show layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.
6.16.8.26
Show marker info
Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.
6.16.8.27
Show markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.
6.16.8.28
Show minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window.
Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red
square.
6.16.8.29
Show waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create
and save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints
Page 183
6.16.8.30
Show zones
You can view zones on iBwave maps. Zones in iBwave files are defined as MapInfo mif/mid files.
Right-click on the map and select Show Zones to display/hide the zones on the floorplan. Click on
a zone with the arrow tool to select the zone (the map is zoomed to the zone and the zone is drawn
less transparent).
6.16.8.31
Full screen
Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on
Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.
6.16.8.32
Layer Properties Indoor map
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings. See chapter Route properties
6.16.8.33
Page 184
Indoor Properties dialog
Offset between routes defines the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map. This value
is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.
With the Save markers in lat/lon format when the floorplan uses UTM coordinates option
you can select to save markers in GPS (lat/lon) WGS84 format when the iBwave map file has UTM
coordinates. The coordinate system used is saved to the marker file. In playback mode, the
coordinate system is detected when loading marker files so that both WGS84 and UTM format
marker files are displayed correctly.
6.16.8.34
MapX Properties dialog
Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these
settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file
by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map
button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.
If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table
shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are
displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is
under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map
on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki)
on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose
the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you
can change the maps position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can
decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the
layer from the list and click the Remove button.
Page 185
6.17 Measurement profiles

To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create
measurement profiles. A measurement profile contains all the necessary settings for making data
transfers, voice/video calls, sending messages, etc. The measurement profiles can also be exported
to another Nemo Outdoor system. See chapter Export/import settings for more information on
exporting settings.
To create a new measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a
service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.
In the Measurement Profiles dialog, click the Add button to create a new measurement profile
for the selected service or select one of the existing profiles. Type a name for the new
measurement profile and click OK.
A configuration dialog for the selected service is opened. Enter the required information and click
OK. The measurement profile is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog. In the future you can
just select the measurement profile from the list and start measuring.
6.18 IP packet capturing

With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can
be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal. A separate log file is generated
for each test terminal making data transfers.
In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor:
Page 186
1.
First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to download the free
Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows) or
NM34_x64.exe (for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on Download.
2.
Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor
3.4 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in the installation
wizard to finish the installation.
3.
Next, install Nemo Outdoor.
4.
For 64-bit Windows you need to install an additional setup of Nemo Packet Monitor x64
7.x.x.exe (Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Packet Monitor must be of the same version) found in
the Nemo Outdoor product package. Double-click the file and follow the steps in the
installation wizard to finish the installation.
5.
Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties,

Measurement page. Select the Enable IP Capture option.
Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is
not installed.
IP packet capture measurement option has several states:
Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all
Enabled: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access time is
recorded
Partial logging: only message headers are recorded
Full logging: all messages are recorded
The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP
capturing is enabled.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the Enable IP Capture
field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the
measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in
Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.
6.19 Making script files
Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.

The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for
script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script
Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several Script Editor dialogs open and to
copy and paste commands from one script to another.
You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E).
Page 187
The table in the middle will show a list of all functions and parameters that will be executed during
a measurement.
Click the Add button to add commands in the script.
Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. Select a row from the table and click the button
to change the settings for that function.
Delete deletes the selected entry row.
Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script.
Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script.
Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.
Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements.
The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.
When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have
been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example,
if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties Configuration dialog, that
number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not
appear.
New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.
Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.
Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting
the file name.
Close exits the dialog.
Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF
loop.
Examples of conditions:
Is different: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm
Page 188
Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered
Is changed: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed
Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered. The
reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement and
when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered. The
next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value.
For example,
Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm triggers the IF string
Carrier RSSI value -70dBm nothing happens
Carrier RSSI value -68dBm Triggers the IF string
6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands

With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. For example, a data
transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for its completion. It is
also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not completed during a
user-defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. Please
note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.
The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait
commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to
UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes.
In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration
is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait
until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for
the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice
call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes
first.
Page 189
GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to
UMTS.
The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the
script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5
seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The
script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system
changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call
duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or
after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call
would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.
Page 190
In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The data transfer is aborted when
the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds; voice call is continued. The call duration is 60
seconds.
In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. The data transfer and voice
call are aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first.
The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, but data transfer is
continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command.
Page 191
6.19.2 Add menu
The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. Selecting an item may open a
dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for more
detailed information on the dialogs. The Start External Application item is described in more
detail in chapter Start external application.
In the Script Editor, by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send
DTMF sequences. You can, for example, make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF
tones. This command can only be used during voice calls.
Page 192
6.19.2.1
Receive call
In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.
Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If
the value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call reception
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Reception
Timeout value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server.
Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection
settings.
Own number defines the devices phone number.
Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number.
Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Page 193
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Script Editor.
Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.
Page 194
6.19.2.2
Wait settings
To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different
conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.
With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script
continues.
With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization
points inside the script file. Nemo Outdoors script group functionality enables you to synchronize
the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization
methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user.
In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP
download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is
different. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the
Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.
Page 195
Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called PS data.
Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be
synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization
points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of
synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal.
With the Wait Fixed and Random options you can define a fixed wait time (in ms) or a random
time (define the minimum and maximum values in ms) and then select one of the following:
Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.
Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script pause for 60
seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing before the
call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here.
With the Custom condition option you can make the script wait for a custom condition.
Click the Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Conditions dialog where you can
define a wait condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.
Page 196
Next notification: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the
system changes from GSM to UMTS.
Current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the dropdown menu is in use.
But at most value is the maximum wait time in ms if the defined notification does not
appear.
Adding a pause in the script file:

1.
First define the wait time in ms.
2.
Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or
after a certain event notification, such as, call attempt.
3.
If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum
wait time in ms after which the script will continue.
Page 197
6.19.2.3
Advanced script settings
6.19.2.3.1
Conditional blocks
By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can
define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the
script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of
commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be
skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.
Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. In the
Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be
met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place. In this example the serving system
must be UMTS FDD. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. Click Add to list to
add the condition to the list. If you want to remove the condition from the list, select it and click
Remove. Click OK.
Page 198
Next, add commands to the script from the Add menu, and move them to their appropriate places
with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the
fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are
met, the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed.
Page 199
6.19.2.3.2
Loops
You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop, you will
enter the Loop Settings dialog.
You can select from the following loop options:
Repeat the loop x times
Repeat the loop for x minutes
Repeat the loop until the time is x
Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met
With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set
conditions for the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Then define the
condition and value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in
the script.
Page 200
In the first example, the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script.
Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. You can move the
commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example
below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.
The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be
repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been
selected from the Field drop-down menu. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value
needs to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. The commands inside the loop block
will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.
Page 201
In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as
the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.
6.19.2.3.3
Counters and timers
Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter you can
define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in seconds.
Click the Add button in the Script Editor and select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start
Timer. Define a name for the counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected
as a condition in the If and Loop Condition Settings dialogs.
Page 202
Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop
command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The loop
is configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of calls in a
GSM system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.
6.19.3 Running scripts

After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.
To run the script file:

1.
In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field.
Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be
different for each device.
Page 203
2.
Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button
. Nemo Outdoor will start running the
measurement according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts
Automatically option in the User Interface Properties General dialog, Nemo Outdoor will
start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.
3.
The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.
4.
During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device and
click the Start/stop script state for selected device button
in the Devices view. You
can then control the device manually.

5.
After the script is finished, you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop
button
).
6.20 Measurement lists

Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining
multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after
another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in
idle mode.
In Online mode, select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List
dialog.
Page 204
Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the
measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to
add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-monthday hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items
below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last
number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.
Page 205
%a
Abbreviated weekday name
%A
Full weekday name
%b
Abbreviated month name
%B
Full month name
%d
Day of month as decimal number (01 31)
%H
%I
%j
Day of year as decimal number (001 366)
%m
Month as decimal number (01 12)
%M
Minute as decimal number (00 59)
%n
%N
%p
Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S
Second as decimal number (00 59)
%U
Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of

week (00 53)
%w
Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)
%W
Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of

week (00 53)
%y
Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)
%Y
Year with century, as decimal number
%z
Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending

on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%Z
Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending

on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurement lists are paused
or allowed to run. See chapter Measurement areas for more detailed information on creating
measurement areas.
Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.
Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running.
Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a
certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).
Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files
reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).
Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing.
Select the Send measurement results to server option to automatically upload the log files to an
FTP or Nemo Xynergy server after running the measurement list.
Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit
the selected script.
Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.
Start runs the measurement list.
Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default,
measurement list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and load
measurement lists to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.
Page 206
To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the FTP
Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 338 for more information on the
settings.
Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.
To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have not
defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a list
of exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.
Creating a measurement list:

1.
Page 207
Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.
2.
Select a device from the Devices list.
3.
Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the
Script Editor button.
4.
Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.
5.
Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.
6.
The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.
7.
To save the measurement list, click Save.
6.20.1 Measurement areas
Please note that this feature works only with OpenStreetMap data.
Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurements are paused
(blocked areas) or allowed to run (trigger areas). Blocked areas are represented as red rectangles
or polygons and trigger areas are green rectangles or polygons.
To draw and area on the map, select the correct tool for a trigger area or a blocked area and draw
the points on the map. To finish drawing, double-click the last point. The areas can be modified with
the arrow tool by selecting a point along the edge of the area and clicking on the new location.
A list of all defined trigger and blocked areas is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog. You
can remove areas by clicking the X next to the area name.
The pause logic and areas work as follows:
If only trigger areas are defined, measurement is allowed in the trigger areas and other
areas are considered to be blocked, i.e. measurement is not allowed. In the example below,
measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas. Otherwise
measurements will be paused.
If only blocked areas are defined, measurement is not allowed in the blocked areas and
other areas are considered to be trigger areas, i.e. measurement is allowed. In the example
below, measurements will be paused when the test vehicle is in the red areas. Otherwise
measurements will be run normally.
Page 208
If blocked and trigger areas overlap, blocked areas outweigh the trigger areas. In the
example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas.
Otherwise measurements will be paused.
6.21 Forcing functions

Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user
interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via
the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing
features available for each terminal.
Page 209
6.21.1 Channel locking

You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process.
Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you are actually
locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a
call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection can be
established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In other words, the
channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.
To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:
Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only
Serving Cell values.
1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button
in the Devices view and select Channel Locking. You
can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. The Channel
Locking dialog will appear on your screen.
2.
Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it
must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. The button
will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear
in the Device Status view when a lock is activated.
Page 210
3.
Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to release
the channel lock or select a new channel.
6.21.2 Band locking

You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands
and systems. Using the Band Locking dialog, you can force the mobile to use certain bands or
system(s).
You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement
settings button
Page 211
in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking.
Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to
the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog.
A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band
lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.
6.21.3 Network selection

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually register and deregister to and from a mobile network.
Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network Selection.
The Register, Deregister, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in detached
mode.
Page 212
Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click Register to register to a specific network. If you
select Automatic, the device will automatically select the network.
Note that if the device is registered to a network, it is recommended to deregister the

device before registering to another network. Especially when switching between
operators. Also note that all NMR devices have mobile data enabled and the devices are
attached to a network so they need to be deregistered.
Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several
minutes and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the network
name and click Register. From the Device Status view you can observe the status of the device.
To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click Register.
6.21.4 Handover control
This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals.

Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the
mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell.
Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button
Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button
| Start Voice Call).

| Handover Control).
Define the channel and handover type and click OK.
The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force
the handover to.
The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.
Page 213
The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover
suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button
will indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same
command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing
command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a
different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to
scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new target
cell and press the Handover forcing button again.
The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets, i.e.
enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)
During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers
normally.
The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is
GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are
disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band
locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.
Page 214
Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode can
be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing
target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current
active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By
pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set
by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased
values.
In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the
terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve.
Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling
code 6 is selected to be a target cell.
Page 215
Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value 4.7dB. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen
with Ec/N0 value -18.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored
set.
This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports
to the network with biased values.
Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.
Page 216
When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers
to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/
measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use
this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place
when driving away from a base station.
Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another.
See chapter Making script files.
Page 217
Page 218
6.21.5 Cell barring
This functionality is available for Nokia 2G, Motorola 3G, and HiSilicon-based LTE
terminals.
During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all
end users (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells
(Reverse).
The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement
settings button
in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring. You can also select
Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring.
6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode)

It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button
in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio
On/Off. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Set Terminal Radio On/Off.
The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.
Page 219
6.21.7 AMR codec forcing
This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices.

It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is forced
to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps..
The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties Measurement page.
6.22 Cell testing

The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are
locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking
the Measurement settings button
in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. You can
also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.
Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the
call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the
cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may
remain empty.
Page 220
Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both
by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a
voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP
context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For
example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed
RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined
here will be included in the test
Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value
will be included in the test
Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test
Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a
cell if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor
continues to the next cell or to packet call testing
Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for
the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell.
After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file
Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful
attempts, and the number the number of attempts.
6.23 Missing Neighbor Detection

Realtime missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both
GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements are
also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing
neighbor detection:
Page 221
with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection
a scanner
a scanner and a mobile
Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal
sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells.
Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of
the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the
mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor
measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor
detection functionality.
6.23.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile

1.
2.
Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.

In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button
Select Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor
detection in the Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.
Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and
Top-N option deselected.
Page 222
3.
Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.
4.
Click OK and OK.
5.
Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already,
and select Measurement control
| Start Single Shot Scanning or Start
Continuous Scanning.
6.
Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning
results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports
possible detected missing neighbors.
6.23.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile

You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor
detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer
3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is
not available for CDMA/EVDO.
A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor
list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the
neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can
observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters,
such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors.
Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are
measuring the same frequency and channels.
From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog.
The field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for
missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a
missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.
Page 223
In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However,
note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection
results.
Page 224
Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.
RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm
Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New,
click the New Layer button
and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the
selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).
6.24 Pilot pollution analysis

Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be
performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot
pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is
no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the
network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events,
and analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo
Outdoors UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match.
Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.
The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.
Page 225
Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.
Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB.
RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.
RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm
Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from
the best active set Ec/N0 value.
Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set
to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from
the best active set Ec/I0 value.
Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are
within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes
active and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three
pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.
Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells
that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes
active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three
pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell.
Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button
6.24.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.
The event includes the following information:
Source system
Source band
Source channel number
Pilot pollution scrambling code
Pilot pollution Ec/N0
Pilot pollution RSCP
Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at
the moment.
Page 226
Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.
Page 227
6.24.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements
Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value
6.24.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.
The event includes the following information:
Page 228
Source system
Source band
Source channel number
Pilot pollution scrambling code
Pilot pollution Ec/I0
Pilot pollution RSCP
Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.
6.24.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners
Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value
6.25 GSM interference analysis

In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel
interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent
channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a
terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a
minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for
adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should
be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of
band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:
Page 229
Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB
200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB
GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and
playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g.
missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner
measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports
RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make
correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.
In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH
channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference
situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also
by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC
information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It
should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this
limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals.
During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I
value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when
AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the
network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all
test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:
RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I
These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference
analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH
channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The user can define
triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are:
RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)
RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)
Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)
The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:
Page 230
Terminal serving channel number
or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping
Cell ID
RX level sub
RX quality sub
C/I if available
For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner
measurements and written to terminal measurement file:
Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X
Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)
Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)
Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a
table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can
be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom
windows for GSM interference analysis. Table grid and bar graph.
6.26 Band scan

With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. All specified channels are scanned for
the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN,
WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Signal
strength and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas
where broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown.
Page 231
To start a band scan, right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.
Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. Please
note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.
Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for
the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold values it
takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands.
The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.
Page 232
Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a text
file (.csv).
Page 233
6.27 Timeslot testing
This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.
With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.
Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration
dialog will be opened.
Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.
Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested.
Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option, the test may continue
indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.
Page 234
In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.
Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore
cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the button to enter the Select Channel dialog.
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude
them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color
indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number
of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel
and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the
previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if
the user stops the testing.
The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.
Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded
from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.
Page 235
6.28 Viewing graphs

There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some pre-made custom windows of
each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See chapter Custom
windows for opening custom windows. To open an empty graph, select Data | [graph type] |
New.
It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse pointer on
top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about that
particular parameter.
Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press
down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. After this,
right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which
you want the parameter to be opened.
The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.
Page 236
6.28.1 Graph popup menu

Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
graph.
6.28.1.1
measurement.
Page 237
6.28.1.2
Save custom window changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.28.1.3
Save as new custom window
6.28.1.4
Save as image
6.28.1.5
Move view to
6.28.1.6
Graph Properties dialog
Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph
Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button
. Please
note that the contents of this dialog varies depending on the graph type (line, bar, scatter,
spectrum).
Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above
the bar in the graph.
Value label placement defines wether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar.
Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the
axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes.
This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.
Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-scale
automatically scales to the displayed data.
Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter
full screen mode.
Page 238
6.28.1.7
Edit Parameters dialog
By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog.
Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow
button
. Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button
You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Use the up
and down
arrow
buttons to move the parameters in the editing field.
The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. This functionality is
particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.
6.28.1.8
Side panel
Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. You can also open it by
clicking the Side Panel dialog button
6.28.1.8.1
Layers
Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel.
6.28.1.8.2
Values
Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel.
Page 239
6.28.1.9
Full screen
Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.
6.28.2 Zoom - Scatter graph

To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot
towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse
from a red dot to a green dot.
Page 240
6.28.3 Graph side panel - Layers
The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. For example, a layer can be
dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button
to remove the layer. The order of the layers
can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.
The layer is now removed.
To create space in the graph side panel, you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner
of the Layers view. To reopen the view, right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup
menu. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the
Layers view.
Page 241
Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.
Page 242
6.28.3.1
Grouping layers
The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up, Move Group Down and
Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be
used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be
displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.
The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.
Page 243
Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.
The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.
Page 244
Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and
drag and drop parameters into the group.
6.28.3.2
New layer
The New Layer command creates a new layer.
Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.
Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more
detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.
Page 245
6.28.3.3
Hide layer
The Hide Layer button
6.28.3.4
hides the selected layer.
Remove layer
The Remove Layer button
6.28.3.5
removes the selected layer.
Layer Properties dialog
Click on the Layer Properties
icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be
accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the
selected layer.
Line width defines the line thickness in pixels.

Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter.
Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"
appearance) or one straight line.
Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on
descending or ascending order.
Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled.
Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 =
totally transparent).
Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line.
There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and
bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic
(algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see
chapter Graph layer color configuration).
Page 246
Window size defines the number of values to be averaged.

Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based
on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen.
Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the
user, so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed.
Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to
No.
Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used
Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used.
Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes
below or above the minimum and maximum values.
Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters:
Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3
or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used
Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or
ch 3 or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not
used so that it is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both
Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3

or); if the list is empty, no filtering is used
TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no
filtering is used
TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g.,
only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph
BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g.,
below bottom three RX levels are shown.
Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The
data tip will display information from that point of time.
Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters
are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs
include also the following layer properties.
Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the
instantaneous values in the graph
Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph
Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.
6.28.3.6
Arrow down/up
The Arrow Down
and Arrow Up
icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph
panel. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the
Layers view with the mouse.
Page 247
6.28.3.7
Layer device selection
The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be
reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Device
Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using
layer properties dialog for each layer separately.
6.28.4 Graph side panel Values and parameter

The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement
defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and
double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.
If a given parameter value consists of more than one value, a separate parameter window, an
extended values list, appears.
Page 248
In the example above, the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one
parameter and its values. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. You can also
drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside, beside, above or below each other. For
example, in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view.
In the example below all views are separate. By clicking the maximize icon
hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon
at the upper rightat the top to close
the view. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values.
By right-clicking on the Values view, you can access the Edit Parameters dialog.
Page 249
6.28.5 Graph layer color configuration

Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used
with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as
different colors can be assigned e.g., to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add
parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in
the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.
If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the
color automatically.
Page 250
If you choose Fixed color, click to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in
the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored
based on the fixed color you selected.
Page 251
Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter
and Color set fields.
Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set
drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set
parameter menu.
To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set
Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information.
The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.
Page 252
In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is
presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.
Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers.
All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information
are shown with black color.
Page 253
The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.
6.28.6 Spectrum graphs

Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results.
By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for certain
frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed via edit marker
window.
Page 254
With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter for
each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line field.
The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is
drawn in red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.
Page 255
6.28.7 Color grid graphs

Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the X-axis
represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted (channel, cell,
etc.). The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position represents the value.
Color grid graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.
6.28.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph

In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the
top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the example
below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI
value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI
type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.
Page 256
If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA
link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last
sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample
duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and
for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.
6.29 Viewing grids

Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement
events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3
messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events
can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a
separate window. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu
select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in
New Window option.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function in Device Settings
Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to
performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate
.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the
measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in
Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor to be installed.
Please see chapter IP packet capturing for more information.
An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of the
ready-made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor, you need
to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View
dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows to
view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several
devices simultaneously as separate columns.
Page 257
You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter
and drag it in the grid. It will be added there.
6.29.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message

You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its
decoded message. Select the grid view, press Ctrl + F, and type the search string in the Search
string field in the Find dialog. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the
Direction field, the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.
6.29.2 Grid popup menu

Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.
Page 258
6.29.2.1
Page 259
measurement.
6.29.2.2
6.29.2.3
With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item will
open the Custom Window Properties dialog.
6.29.2.4
Move view to
6.29.2.5
Automatic scrolling
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement
progresses.
6.29.2.6
Add/remove separator
In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read. Select
Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.
6.29.2.7
Open
Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table grid,
map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.
6.29.2.8
Grid color configuration in events grids
To make grids more clear, you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or
event ID. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu, or click on the
Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is
opened.
Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices.
In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. You can set a text
color and/or a background color for the selected events. If you want to colorize the background,
select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text
Color Set field. Alternatively, if you want to colorize only the text in the grid, select Call Events
(Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the
Background Color Set field, as in the example below. Note that the contents of the Grid Color
Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.
Page 260
Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string.
Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add
Page 261
In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color
code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.
Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Finally, click OK in the Grid
Color Configuration dialog. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color
corresponds to a certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.
Page 262
6.29.2.9
Grid color configuration based on decoded message in grids
Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a messages decoded message.
In this case, you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor. It is possible to color-code
both the text in the grid and the background color. While you can choose to colorize only one of
them, it is also possible to color-code both text and background. For example, you can have a
message appear in white text and blue background color. However, in that case remember to create
two new color sets for the same string, for example, Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Below
you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click
Add
Page 263
In the Color Set Properties dialog type, for example, Decoded Text in the Name field. You can
also create a short name for the new color set, or write a description for it. Select string as the color
set type. Click Add In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the
messages to be colored with the new color set.
Page 264
Click OK, and Close in the Color Set Editor.
Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid
and/or the background color. If you want to colorize only the text, select the new color set created
above, Decoded Text, in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set
field. In this example the background will be color-coded, so (none) is selected in the Text Color
Set field, and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.
Page 265
All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text
color set.
6.29.2.10
Grid color configuration in events grids based on message name
Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. You can color-code
the message text or the background color, or both. Color-coding a message based on its name is
done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message.
However, when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor | Color Set Properties | String
Properties, you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string
in the decoded message. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same
message name. Further, both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK.
Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.
Page 266
Page 267
Next, right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors, or select Configure Colors in
the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the
Background Color Set field. Click OK.
All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets.
Page 268
6.29.2.11
Grid color configuration for parameter grids
Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid.
Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click
Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. The Clear All button
inactivates the default color sets. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to
them. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background
Color Set drop-down menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the
background of the text/values in the grid. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for
the same parameter, note that you need to use two different color sets for it.
Page 269
You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit In the Color Set
Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.
Page 270
Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a
background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color
Configuration dialog.
6.29.2.12
Grid color configuration for table grids
Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. In the Grid
Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Click OK.
Page 271
The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. You can also edit the default
color sets. Right-click on the grid, select Configure Colors the parameter you wish to edit, and
Edit The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. Click
OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.
You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are
used simultaneously.
6.29.2.13
Configure filters/quick filters
Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected
messages will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup
menu
Page 272
The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.
Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding
all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would
like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you
would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all
lines.
You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus
button. A conditional row appears
giving you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.
Page 273
It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition,
you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the
Other Parameter item in the filter target popup menu.
The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is
selected.
Note also that a separate, independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon
at the top
left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents, the plus icon
next to
the first constituent needs to be clicked. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with
one another with the text and if, and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place.
Page 274
In the example above, a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value
that is less than -5. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text
SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18, the message is filtered out
from the grid.
The minus icon
removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by
right-clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu.
The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in
the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.
You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. You can choose to hide the
respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event),
subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). All
messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the same
way, you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to
delete all filter rules.
When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.
6.29.2.14
Create notification
Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event. For
more information, see chapter Notification Configuration.
6.29.2.15
Decode message
This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by
double-clicking on the message row.
In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message
Message
grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or
back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message

message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard
message decoding grid as text to clipboard.
Page 275
and Show Previous
button to move to the same

button to copy the contents of the
With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the
contents of the decoded message in three different ways.
The Format as list
arranges the contents of a grids measurement results in a list. The Format
as horizontal table
arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and
the Format as vertical table
arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the
decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.
Select a string of text in the decoded text, right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text
as text to the clipboard. If no text is selected in the decoded text window, all text in it will be
copied. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard
Page 276
functionality.
6.29.2.16
Decode message in new window
This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.
6.29.2.17
Automatic decode
The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest
message in decoded form.
6.29.2.18
Save - Grid
The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the
Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire
grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File
or into a CSV file.
6.29.2.19
MapInfo Tab-file export
You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save |
MapInfo Tab-File. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.
6.29.2.20
CSV file export
You can export measurement data into a CSV file. In an Events grid, select Save | CSV File.
The exporting is supported for a single file, and the column separator can be a comma, semicolon,
tab or space. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not supported
at the moment. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export.
Page 277
6.29.2.21
Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as
text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied
on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another
application.
Select All
Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and
quick way to select all lines, for example, to be exported.
6.29.2.22
Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.
Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match
case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to
decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. To move down to the
next match, press F3. To move up to the next match, press Shift+F3.
The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded
message window.
Page 278
Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view.
Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view
Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)
Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)
Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused)
Full Screen
The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.
6.29.2.23
Grid Properties dialog
Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog
is opened.
Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid
type and on the measurement device.
Page 279
You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. The
available parameters/events are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. If you select,
for example, the UMTS option, all the parameters/events under UMTS are selected. You can also
select individual parameters/events. Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter/event, and
the tooltip will display more information about that particular parameter/event.
In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change their
order using the arrow buttons.
Page 280
6.29.2.24
User parameters
The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be
automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. Click the User
Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.
Click the Add button to define new parameters.
Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be
decoded.
Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example,
Ordered MS power level.
Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.
Page 281
After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the
Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User
Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.
The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.
User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex
searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to
search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.
It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter
Export/import settings for more information.
6.30 Viewing maps

Nemo Outdoor supports two types of outdoor maps: MapX and OpenStreetMap maps. Most of the
functions are the same for both types but there are some differences.
Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be
connected to the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be downloaded on the computer.
Page 282
Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New MapX or New OpenStreetMap. If you open a new
MapX map, Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map
field in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map, the
view will center on your current location.
The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the
popup menu when right-clicking on the map. See chapter Map toolbar buttons for a description of
the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons.
Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor
measurements, refer to chapter Viewing indoor maps.
It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be opened
for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the
devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish
to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.
If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will
be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you
can define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool
(the button is
activated when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all
location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You
can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem
areas on a map.
Page 283
While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with
information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.
6.30.1 Base stations on a map

If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A
line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving
base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.
Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS
Properties Connected devices).
The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the
antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base
station icon to see more information about the BTS.
Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with
In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.
Page 284
6.30.1.1
Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor
It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS file on
a map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and the BTS icon
is moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes are saved in the BTS
file when you exit Nemo Outdoor.
Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Add Site. In the BTS
Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new sites, cells, and neighbor
cells by clicking the Add button.
For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.
Page 285
Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.
The settings below are mandatory.

System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs.
Cell name defines a unique name for the cell.
Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna in degrees.
Channel number defines the channel number.
Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell.
Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell.
Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell.
The settings below are optional.
Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters.
Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal plane.
Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees.
Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers.
For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, and repeater.
Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs.
Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs.
UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.
6.30.2 MapX maps

You can customize the MapX map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be
saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot
be directly opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the
MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional.
This file (.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.
Page 286
Each MapInfo raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When MapInfo
raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains information
about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular
map. When using vector data for MapInfo, there are three different files that need to be in the
same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for raster
maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo map. If you are using a large map
(size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We
recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning
the color map to black and white.
6.30.2.1
MapInfo Tab-file export
You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save |
MapInfo Tab-File. To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select
Route Plan | Save as MapInfo Tab-File.
The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be exported.
Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer
title for the exported .tab file.
To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and
click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol
Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally
click OK.
Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.
Page 287
6.30.3 Route plans

Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement.
You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can
manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during
playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the
Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if
you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as
a custom window for later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set
or Waypoints views.
If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open
Route Plan item in the map toolbar
or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route Plan |
Open from the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side
panel, and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one
waypoint to the next.
6.30.3.1
Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints
Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline
mode. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see Configuration
through Welcome page) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window, or alternatively you
can open a map manually from Data | Map.
You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint
button in the map
toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add
button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan
(.rpf) appears in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan
for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan
map popup menu.
Page 288
icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the
You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next
waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a
measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle
mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the
Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint
items will also be disabled.
The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is
selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected
on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance
to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the
current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. The
Distance from previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is from the previous
waypoint from the current position on the route. With the Next button you can move from one
waypoint to the next.
You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view.
To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a
waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition, the
delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the
selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will
automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first
waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete
button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map.
Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.
You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint
on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the
map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. With the Reverse
button you can reverse the direction of the route plan.
Page 289
The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be
activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When
you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.
6.30.3.2
Creating and saving route plans from a measurement
In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a
measurement.
Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and
select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS
coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan
toolbar icon, or select
Route Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map,
the layer list should have a new layer (Untitled.rpf), and the control buttons on the Waypoints
view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created.
Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan
item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the
map popup menu.

You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom
of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom
in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle
among all the circles. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more
information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan
during a measurement.
6.30.3.3
Saving a route plan to a custom window
When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File
(.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific
properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom
window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window].
You will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window].
First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side
panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the
settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As
Custom Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved.
When you open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.
Page 290
6.30.4 Map popup menu

Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
map. Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type (MapX or
OpenStreetMap).
Page 291
6.30.4.1
measurement.
6.30.4.2
6.30.4.3
6.30.4.4
Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.
6.30.4.5
Save as - Image
6.30.4.6
Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
Page 292
6.30.4.7
Export to Google Earth
By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route,
colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml
file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.
6.30.4.8
Move view to
6.30.4.9
Open map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.30.4.10
Save map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.
6.30.4.11
Find map at position
When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will
view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have
specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the
possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. You can also browse for a
suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders.
Page 293
6.30.4.12
Download tiles
With the Download Tiles tool you can download OpenStreetMap data on your computer so you can
use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet.
It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as downloading

map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.
Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is downloaded. The more levels
you choose, the more data is downloaded.
Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data.
Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will be
downloaded.
6.30.4.13
Empty disk cache
Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all downloaded OpenStreetMap data. The tiles open
on the map will not be deleted.
6.30.4.14
Route plan - Create
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.
6.30.4.15
Route plan - Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.
6.30.4.16
Route plan - Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.
6.30.4.17
Route plan - Save as MapInfo Tab-file
The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file that
can be opened in MapInfo. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.
6.30.4.18
Add waypoint
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
Page 294
6.30.4.19
Tool
Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.
Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.
Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.
Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.
Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and
out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.
Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is
activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that
this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be
used during playback.
6.30.4.20
Auto center
The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the
map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is
selected.
6.30.4.21
Auto clear route
The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is
stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the
tool.
6.30.4.22
Previous view and view entire map
With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire
Map command displays the whole map.
6.30.4.23
View entire route
By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.
6.30.4.24
Scale
The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated.
6.30.4.25
Modify route
With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback.
This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix
was lost in a tunnel.
Page 295
Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu.
The route will be displayed as dots.
Page 296
Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct
order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.
When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool.
The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.
6.30.4.26
Add site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
Page 297
6.30.4.27
Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the
text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select
Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.
6.30.4.28
Side panels
6.30.4.29
Color legends
The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded
a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color
legends will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to create and edit color
sets.
Page 298
6.30.4.30
Find cell
With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below
a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data entered in the
BTS file header and for neighbor cells.
6.30.4.31
Layers
The Layers side panel displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files,
measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to access
its Properties dialog (see Layer properties). You can hide and display layers by selecting and
deselecting the option next to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons
you can add new layers on the map.
Page 299
6.30.4.32
Measure distance
Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click
the Measure Distance button
to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the
points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total
distance is displayed in the left-hand panel.
With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two
points is used as the radius.
To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To
hide the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.
Page 300
6.30.4.33
Route history
If the Route History side panel is not visible, right-click on the map and select Side Panels | Route
History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded within a specified
time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that a GPX file has been
created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will be searched and define
the time frame. After you click the Search button, Outdoor will search for the GPX files and display
the matching routes on the map.
The search results will also be displayed as layers. Double-click the route history layer to open the
Route History Route Properties dialog where you can edit the route color and thickness.
6.30.4.34
Waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create
and save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least
one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. This
functionality is not active during measurement playback. See chapter Creating and modifying route
plans with waypoints for more information.
6.30.4.35
Full screen
Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.
Page 301
6.30.4.36
Layer properties
The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in
the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the
device-specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.
6.30.4.37
Route properties
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.
Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.

Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting
point of the measurement route.
by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window.
Page 302
Line thickness defines the thickness of the route in pixels.

The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To
define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties dialog.
With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in
numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background
colors.
Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.
The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the
Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in
pixels.
When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is
paused.
Page 303
Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with
the same color.
If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select Yes for Use color set.
First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color
set in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set button
to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on
defining color sets.
Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the
route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid
values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.
If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels,
frequencies, or scrambling codes for which the parameter values are displayed.
Page 304
To filter spectrum scanning results, define the frequency exactly in the same format as it appears in
the Spectrum graph.
To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected
channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the Select
button under Selected scrambling codes.
If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select
from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.
Page 305
When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For
example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is
not drawn while in GSM.
Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define
the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.
Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file
by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel.
Page 306
Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to
the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from active
system cell(s) to the test vehicle.
Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined maximum
number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters:
GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full
UMTS: Ec/N0
CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io
LTE: RSRP
Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that
lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If
missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the
map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.
Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with
this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output
file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used
with the terminal.
Page 307
By selecting the Show Textual notes option, you will be able to view textual notes on a
measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note in
the Text color and Background color fields.
Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog.
6.30.4.38
BTS Properties dialog
When a base station file is selected in the map side panel, the BTS Properties dialog appears when
Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the BTS file in the map side panel.
BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map.
If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM),
select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the
active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base
stations are hidden.
Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active
system base stations and for other base stations.
Selected cell color defines a color for a cell that is selected on the map. Neighboring cells
are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color
but with a bolded outline. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.
Page 308
Serving cell color defines a color for the currently serving cell.
Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base
stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.
Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base
stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.
Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit
existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.
Page 309
See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on how to edit and create color sets.
Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell
information and define the Text color and Background color.
Page 310
In the example below, all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.
Page 311
Select the Draw cell range option to view the cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell
range transparency in the Cell range transparency.
DAS anomaly analysis can be used to automatically perform pass/fail analysis for indoor cells. See
chapter DAS anomaly analysis for more information.
The Connected devices displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.
Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.
Page 312
6.30.4.39
Route Plan Properties dialog
When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer
Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel.
Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.
The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line
attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.
6.30.4.40
Map Properties dialog
In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map. This
value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the Route properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.
Page 313
6.30.4.41
MapX Properties dialog
by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map
button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.
If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table
shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are
displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is
under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map
on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki)
on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose
the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you
can change the maps position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can
decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the
layer from the list and click the Remove button.
Page 314
6.30.5 Color Set Editor

You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route
Properties | Color dialog. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set
Editor.., or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). With the Color
Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. In the Color Set
Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets by selecting the
Type. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an existing color set, double-click on
the color set.
Page 315
In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.
Name and Short name identify the color set.

You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.
Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, numerical, gradient, string, or automatic.
T The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.
With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some fixed
values while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical or string
type of colorset. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g. PNs and scr.
code).
Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.
Page 316
Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the
color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for
the value range. Finally click OK.
Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range
dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by
the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the
parameter values.
Page 317
6.30.6 Map example 1

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set.
In the Route Properties | Route dialog, Color page, select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the
Parameter field, and Active set size in the Color Set field, and click OK. The Color Legend in the
map side panel displays the color codes for the Active set size values.
Page 318

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. In the
Measurement's Route Properties dialog, Color page, select TX Power in the Parameter and
Color Set fields and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for
the TX Power values. In this color set, green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.
Page 319

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. Base station icons
are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor
stations.
In the Layer view in the map side panel, click on Add BTS File, or right-click on the measurement
layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again,
and select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station, and Draw
line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. On the Color page, select the Use color set option, select
Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field, and EcN0 in the Color set field. Click OK. The Color Legend
in the side panel displays the color codes for the EcNo values.
Page 320

In the map below, the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. The route with the blue
current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set, and the route with the black current
location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set.
In the Layers view click the Add Route button, or right-click on the existing measurement layer
and select Add Route. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page, and now there
should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. Right-click on the first
measurement route and select Properties. On the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use
color set option, and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field, and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. Click
OK.
Next, right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view, and select Properties. In the
Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and MS Power Level in the
Parameter field, and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK.
You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. In
addition, you will see the measurements in the Layers view, and their color sets in the Color
legends view in the map side panel.
Page 321
6.30.10
Map example 5
It is possible to export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter,
parameter values, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file. The Google
Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file.
Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button
Page 322
in the map window.
A Save As dialog appears. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field, and type
a name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Click Save.
Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Note that you must have
Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.
The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.
Page 323
6.30.11
Map Example 6
With scanner measurements, it is possible to view parameter values for a specific channel or
scrambling code on a map. In this example we will view RX level values for a selected channel.
First open a scanner measurement on a map.
Right-click on the route layer in the Layers view and select Properties.
Page 324
On the Route Properties, Color page, select Use color set. Select RX level in the Parameter
field. The corresponding color set is selected automatically.
Click on Configure Filters. In the Select Channels dialog, first click Remove All and then select
one channel by double-clicking on the channel in the Available list. Click OK and OK.
The route now displays the RX level values for the selected channel.
Page 325
6.31 Export/import settings

It is possible to export and import various settings and measurement lists from and to Nemo
Outdoor. This function can also be used to send configurations remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an
(S)FTP server.
6.31.1 Export settings to file

To export settings to a file, go to File | Export Settings | To File in Nemo Outdoor. Define a
name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.
Page 326
The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.
6.31.2 Export settings to FTP server

To export settings to an FTP server, go to File | Export Settings | To FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.
Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 338 for more
information on the settings.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.
Page 327
The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The exported
settings can now be downloaded from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with access to the
server.
6.31.3 Import settings from file

To import settings, select File | Import Settings | From File in Nemo Outdoor. Select the file and
click Open.
Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.
Page 328
Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.
6.31.4 Import settings from FTP server

To import settings from an FTP server, select File | Import Settings | From FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server
settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.
Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.
Page 329
Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.
Page 330
ENDING MEASUREMENTS
The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main
window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.
To end measurements:
1.
If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script
file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop
Script or by clicking the Stop button
2.
on the toolbar.
If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated

either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button
on the toolbar.
All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be
stopped, PDP context will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed.
3.
Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can
choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this
file.
4.
If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor, select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right
corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window.
When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not
recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select
Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the
measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report
values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate
calls to be shorter than they actually were.
Page 331
7.1
Measurement report
The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some
statistics from the measurement.
Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The
filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder.
Select the Send measurement results to FTP server option to send the log files to an FTP
server. See chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.
If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.
binary files (.nbl)
marker files (.mrk)
To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file
name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. To export
the measurement, click the Export button (see Exporting measurements).
Page 332
Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click
Save.
Note that if you press Esc on your computers keyboard, or click on the
button on the
dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.
Click the Export button the access the Export Measurements dialog (see Exporting measurements).
Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.
Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer
where Nemo Outdoor is installed.
In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report
template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a
report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo
Analyze. Finally click Export.
Page 333
MEASUREMENT RESULTS
This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo
Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.
The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you
have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file
name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the
file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the
device number.
8.1
Analyzing measurement results

The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example,
with:
Nemo Outdoor Playback functions
Nemo Analyze
Nemo WindCatcher
Text editor
Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel
Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite.
8.2
Playing back measurement files

Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files
anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.
8.2.1
Selecting playback files

When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo
Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will
save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the
playback when you close the playback file(s).
Page 334
To open files for playback, select File Open Measurement. This will open up the following
dialog.
In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the button. The File Header box displays the
measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can remove some of the
files from playback.
8.2.2
During playback
The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be
found in the Playback menu.
The Play button starts the playback.
The Pause button pauses the playback.
The Stop button stops the playback.
The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the
starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into
certain points in the measurement.
Page 335
8.2.3
Viewing and moving markers

You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during
measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or
click the Play button on the tool bar.
Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers.
The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements.
Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the
same point of time.
Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the
markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button.
Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is
saved in the marker file.
Page 336
8.2.4
Closing playback files

After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved
the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would
like to load the same device(s).
8.3
Uploading measurement files to server

You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server or to Nemo Xynergy
database when a measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user
interface. Note that it is recommended to stop all measurements before uploading files.
Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type, FTP or Xynergy from the
bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files.
Page 337
Click the Options button to define settings for the selected server (FTP or Nemo Xynergy). After
configuring the settings, click OK. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.
If you upload files on an HTTPS server, the URL from which the file can be loaded is displayed for
each uploaded file. URLs can be easily copied and distributed e.g. by email.
8.3.1
FTP Options
Define the server address, username, and password and the name of the Remote folder, i.e.
folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use SFTP protocol option to send the measurement files using SFTP protocol.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
Page 338
When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement
files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the
transfer. You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths |
Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or via mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
8.3.2
Nemo Xynergy Options
Define the username, password, and URI and click the Refresh button. Nemo Outdoor will
connect with the Nemo Xynergy server. After the connection has been established, you will be able
to define the project type (acceptance, optimization, benchmarking), region, market, cluster,
and project. You can also add new clusters and projects.
Page 339
8.4
Exporting measurements
With the Export Measurements functionality it is possible to export measurement files from Nemo
File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. Close all measurements and select File | Export
Measurements. You can also export individual measurements through the Measurement report
dialog when you are ending measurements.
Page 340
The Export Measurements dialog is opened.
Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a new
template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select the
parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the parameters, the
settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field the next time you
open the Export Measurements dialog.
With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement files or
entire folders containing measurement files to be exported.
Export format defines the format in which the files are stored. The options are MapInfo TAB file
and CSV file.
Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for
parameters that can have multiple values.
Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled from
the measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported.
By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a
separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.
Page 341
With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define the
Target folder.
With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file.
Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.
Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to the
right. The selected parameters will be exported.
You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter
values that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.
Page 342
Select a parameter from the field in the middle. Then define the condition and value for the
parameter and click Add to List. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK.
When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.
Page 343
USER INTERFACE
This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. You will find general descriptions on all the
commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail
in the following sections.
The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows standards. If you are not
familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft Windows Documentation.
9.1
View groups
View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for
easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time
and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can
create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group
appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.
When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename
the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.
Enter a name for the view group and click OK.
To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and
select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as
another tab.
To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps,
and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another
view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows
there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time
you start Nemo Outdoor.
Page 344
To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view group
label and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and select the
device for which the data is displayed.
If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying data,
right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list. All the
views in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.
9.2
Menu bar
The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some
commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog
with options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots () will open a dialog. Note
that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are
presented on the menus next to the menu commands.
9.3
Toolbar
You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View
menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the
main window.
The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks
quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the
toolbar. See chapter Toolbar buttons for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.
9.4
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information
depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar
button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the
corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that
appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a
time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.
In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other
objects in the main window.
9.5
Nemo Outdoor menus

The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.
Page 345
9.5.1
File menu
The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations.
Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu.
By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and
opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and
deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send
measurement files to an FTP server (see chapter Uploading measurement files to server). With the
Export Measurements tool you can export measurement files from Nemo File Format to MapInfo
or .csv formats (see chapter Exporting measurements). With the Export and Import Settings
items you can export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the
.aex file:
Scripts
Color sets
Custom views
Device configurations
Notification settings
Route plans
Workspaces
You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export.
The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items
display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files,
respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.
Page 346
9.5.2
Edit menu
In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor
program. It is also possible to export data views as images and open them in third-party tools.
Please note that playback needs to be idle or paused and measurement must be paused when
exporting views.
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.
9.5.3
Page 347
View menu
In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the
standard toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device status, those you
wish to see on the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined
by the user. You can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification
Manager, User Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View
Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing View groups. The Active
View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window.
9.5.4
Measurement menu
Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect,
and remove devices.
The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. These same commands can
be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you
can edit script files. With the Start Measurement List item you can edit and run Measurement
lists. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers
command will empty the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file.
Measurement Servers and Nemo Invex Maintenance Tool items apply only to Nemo Invex.
Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make
a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through
these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.
Page 348
Measurement Properties General, Measurement Properties Measurement, Measurement

Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles, Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with
mobiles, and Measurement Properties - Script dialogs can be accessed through this menu. By
selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for example, if you want to
reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.
The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual
measurements. If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands.
9.5.5
Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device.
Remote menu
Through the Remote menu you can activate the Remote mode, initiate a maintenance session, and
cancel all pending remote sessions.
Page 349
9.5.6
Playback menu
The Playback menu offers you tools for the playback of measurement data. You can also export a
measurement file to Nemo Analyze by selecting Analyze. This will open the Export to Nemo
Analyze dialog.
9.5.7
Data menu
Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. You can also
access the Open Custom Window dialog (see chapter Custom windows).
Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you
select New, Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type.
Page 350
The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. Events grids list, by default, all measurement events
but the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed.
Parameters grids display selected network parameters. Statistics grids list various statistics, such
as, the number of PDP context activation attempts, successes, and failures from the measurement.
Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3, RLC/MAC, and LLC messages. Table grids
provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances.
For example, the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row
represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e.g., system, carrier,
scrambling code, etc.). The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet
capture files in playback mode.
The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see chapter Viewing indoor maps). The Map item opens a map
window (see chapter Viewing maps).
The Save as Custom Window item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The
custom windows are presented in chapter Custom windows.
The Save Custom Window Changes option saves changes to custom windows. For example, if
you resize the windows, Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you
start the program.
9.5.8
Window menu
The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. You can
switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally,
Tile Vertically, and Arrange Icons commands. With the Close All command you can close all
windows at once. The active window is marked with a check mark .
9.5.9
Help menu
The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics, the shortcut guide,
and the Nemo File Format document. By selecting the License Information item, you can check
the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. From the About dialog you can also
receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application, including the contact information and
the application version number.
Page 351
9.6
Parameters view
The Parameters view offers an easy way to open data views for a certain parameter. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on a graph. Alternatively, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type (line graph, vertical
bar, map, indoor view, etc.) from the menu.
Parameters can also be opened for several devices at once. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter
you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type from the menu.
Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display
more information about that particular parameter. The tooltip text can also be copied to clipboard.
Page 352
9.6.1
Parameters view search functionality

A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and
possible alias names.
In addition, the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.e. HSDPA
BLER search string matches, for example, HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER.
9.7
Customizing menus and toolbars

Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. To edit the contents of menus, to add
new menus, or edit the toolbars, right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main
window and select Customize.
In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the
corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog,
type a name for the new toolbar and click OK.
Page 353
The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking
the Delete button.
In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Drag
commands from the list to a toolbar or menu.
Page 354
To remove commands from a toolbar or menu, drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or
menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content, open the Customize dialog
(right-click on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page, select the toolbar or
menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button.
Page 355
In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. For
example, you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu
animations.
You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. Open the Customize dialog, right-click on a
button, and select Change Button Image.
9.8
Nemo Outdoor windows

The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and
events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for
first-time users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some
essential windows for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own
custom windows and save them for later use.
Page 356
9.8.1
Custom windows
Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed
through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. They are also
accessible through the parameter tree. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding
graph and grid types. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open
Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window).
You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by
technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open
from the table on the right and click Open.
You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would
like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as
Custom Window. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. After
clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some custom
windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button.
The Quick Windows bar
(go to View, and select Quick Windows) in
Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Click on one of the quick
windows, and select a custom window from the list. Click OK. The next time you click on the same
quick window button, that selected custom window will appear.
Page 357
9.8.2
Page 358
Devices view
The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs.
The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By
double-clicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs. For
example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.
It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied
to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you can select
the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected multiple devices,
you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices.
From the Supported Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP, etc.)
used in the measurements.
Measurement servers button opens the Measurement
Servers dialog (see Nemo Invex device set-up) where you
can connect to Nemo Invex servers. Note that this button
is activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license
includes the Nemo Invex option.
Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you
can choose to add a new device or remove the selected
device.
Measurement control button offers access to some
commands that are supported by the selected device, such
as, start/stop voice call, GPRS attach/detach, SMS/MMS
message sending.
Measurement settings button offers access to
configuration and properties dialogs. The selection is devicespecific.
Device connection settings button opens the Device
Configuration dialog (see Devices).
Device measurement settings button opens the
Measurement Properties Measurement page for the
selected device.
Device notification settings button opens the
Measurement Properties - Notifications page (see
Notifications) for the selected device.
Device script settings button opens the Measurement
Properties - Script page for the selected device.
Group devices by type/server button organizes the
devices in the view.
Page 359
9.8.3
Device Status view
The Device Status view displays the device status. The green light at the upper left corner is
blinking whenever the device is active and connected.
Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock
the Status view to the top of the main view.
Page 360
Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the
devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and
finally click OK.
Page 361
9.8.4
Output window
The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons (
) next to
the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech
bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and
the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You
can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the
popup menu.
9.8.5
Script Status window
Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available
when making scanner measurements.
From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current
measurement.
9.8.6
Controlling windows
You can have several windows open at the same time. The minimizing, maximizing, and closing
functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. The active
window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows Control Panel to indicate an active
window (see your Microsoft Windows Documentation).
You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main
window.
9.8.6.1 Cascade windows

The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. You
can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible
part of that window (except for the Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons in the top right
corner). You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the
window-specific menu (top left corner of the window).
Page 362
9.8.6.2 Tile windows

The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side, filling the whole space
so that all windows are visible at the same time. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically.
9.8.6.3 Arrange icons

The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of
the main window, starting from the left side. To do this, select the Arrange Icons command in the
Window menu.
9.8.6.4 Close all

The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the
Nemo Outdoor main window.
9.8.6.5 Saving window settings

If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor,
activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Clicking the command will result
on a check mark ; the second click will remove the mark.
Page 363
10 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.
10.1 Low throughput

In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party
applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based
protocols.
In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party
applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.
For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad
coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)
points to capacity, server or transmission problems.
In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).
PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a
bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all
the available bandwidth).
Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there
are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that
prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.
High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.
When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be
higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme
Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio
link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.
Other things that could help troubleshooting:
Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA
USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings
in registry.
Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties Measurement page..
Try another FTP server for comparison.
Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command

prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better
results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making
the transfers. Also try different servers.
For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to
see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.
Page 364
For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol
to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.
10.1.1 All Windows versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark:
Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.
Using Nemo Outdoor:

1.
Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.
2.
Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:
3.
Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the
current value.
Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1.
Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.
TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.
TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.
TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning
TCP window.
2.
A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always
needed.
Page 365
Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size
which is handled by TCP auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is
set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the
registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This
registry entry can be removed.
If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has
been configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.
How to check TCP auto-tuning state:
Page 366
1.
Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.
2.
Type netsh interface tcp show global
3.
Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.
Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.
4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click
and select Run as administrator.
5.
To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits
the TCP window size to 64KB.
6.
To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp
set global autotuning=highlyrestricted.
7.
Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:
disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).
highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default
value, very conservatively.
restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond
its default value.
normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most
conditions.
experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not
recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for
research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.
Page 367
10.2 Device Status view

The Device Status view displays the device status.
If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is
functioning normally.
If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device, rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.
10.3 Cannot add devices

If the Add button
is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo
Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see chapter
Licensing for more information.
If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not
on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).
Page 368
10.4 Required license option missing

If the error message below appears, your copy protection dongle is missing a license option. In
other words, the measurement device supports technologies or features that require additional
license options. For example, if you are measuring with an LTE-A Cat 6 device and you have
purchased the LTE license instead of the LTE-A license, you can use the device with Nemo
Outdoor/Nemo Invex II but the LTE-A parameters will be missing. Please contact Nemo Technical
Support (nemosupport@anite.com) if you wish to purchase the additional license options.
10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers

If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu
online. The Work offline or online button
, check that you have devices
should be unselected.
10.6 Measurement file checksum notification

Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the
measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback.
The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where
modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the
measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.
#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"
Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and
the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or
later.
10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded

With new laptops an error may occur when six or more USB devices are connected to the laptop.
Page 369
The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. Verify that the link points to the correct file and location.
The current of the USB hub used by the laptop exceeds the max. value per device and the driver
blocks additional devices. This applies especially to the USB 3.0 host controllers based on the Intel
chipset.
The issue can be fixed by uninstalling the Intel USB 3.0 host controller driver.
The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. Verify that the link points to the correct file and location.
Note that especially with Lenovo computers, the driver is automatically installed
with system updates. Automated updates should be disabled.
Page 370
11 NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS
11.1 Toolbar buttons

These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
Title
Page 371
Button
Description
Open Playback File(s)
Opens an existing
measurement for
playback
Open Workspace
Opens an existing
workspace file.
Save Workspace
Saves the current

workspace configuration.
Configuration
Manager
Opens the Configuration

Manager dialog.
Work Offline
Switches the offline

mode on and off.
Start Recording
Nemo Outdoor starts

writing a file of the
current measurement.
Start Playback
Starts the playback with

the selected files.
Pause
Pauses the
playback/recording.
Stop
Stops the
playback/recording.
Start/Stop Scripts
Switches a script on/off.
Add Marker
Adds a marker in the

measurement file or on
the Indoor map.
Add Textual Note
Adds a textual note in

the measurement file.
Open Custom Window
Opens the Open Custom

Window dialog.
Save As New Custom

Window
Saves the active window

as a new custom window.
Save Changes to
Custom Window
Saves changes to the

active custom window.
Save As Image
Saves the active window

as an image file (.jpg).
11.2 Dialog buttons

These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor.
Title
Page 372
Button
Description
Expand
Device Info
Window
Displays the selected device info

parameters in the Device Info
window.
Device
notification
settings
Opens the Notifications dialog

where you can select the events
of which Nemo Outdoor will
display or play a notification.
Device
Commands
Through the Device Commands

button you have access to
various mobile specific functions.
Device
Settings
Offers access to several dialogs.
Autodetect
Devices
Automatically detects devices

connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Refresh
Updates information in the

Configuration Manager.
Properties
Opens a Properties dialog for the

selected item in the
Add
Adds a new device, event

trigger, or script depending on
the item selected in the
Remove
Removes the selected device,

event trigger, or script from the
11.3 Graph toolbar buttons

These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs.
Title
Page 373
Button
Description
Hide Layer
Hides the selected layer in the

graph
Remove Layer
Removes the selected layer
New Layer
Opens the New Layer dialog

where you can configure a new
layer to be added in the active
graph.
Layer
Properties
Opens the Layer Properties

dialog where you can edit an
existing layer.
Move Layer
Down
Moves the selected layer down in

the layer view
Move Layer
Up
Moves the selected layer up in

the layer view
Set Stacked
Mode
If there are two or more layers in

a graph, you can view them in
stacked mode; that is, in
separate graphs.
Autoscroll
When the button is pressed

down, the graph is scrolling
automatically as the
measurement proceeds.
Show Panels
Displays the info panel with

numerical values on the right
side of the graph.
11.4 Map toolbar buttons

These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps.
Title
Page 374
Button
Description
Open Map
Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file.
Save Map
Saves the current map layers and settings into a

MapInfo Geoset file (.gst).
Import Map
Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for

importing bitmap images as floorplans. Available only
in the Indoor map.
Layer
Properties
Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where

you can configure the layer properties.
Find Map at
Position
With the automatic map find feature the user can

easily locate all maps from same location.
Create Route
Plan
Creates a route plan from an open measurement.
Open Route
Plan
Through this item you can open saved route plans.
Save Route
Plan
Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File

(.rpf).
Add Waypoint
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating

route plans manually.
Arrow
Changes the cursor into an arrow, which you can use

for selecting items.
Pan
Changes the cursor into a hand, which you can use

for dragging the map to a different position. Place
the hand on the map. Keep the left mouse button
pressed down and move the map.
Center
Changes the cursor into the center tool, which you

can use for selecting a point on the map on which the
map view will be centered.
Zoom In
Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which

you can use for zooming in on the map.
Zoom Out
Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which

you can use for zooming out on the map.
Clear Route
Clears the measurement route from the map. This

button is active only during measurements. It cannot
be used during playback.
Set Current
Location
Set Current Location tool defines the current location

when no GPS data is available. That this command is
activated only during measurements and when no
GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.
Page 375
Auto Center
With the Auto Center tool activated, the map view

will always center on the test vehicle. This requires
that a GPS receiver is used.
Auto Center
Sensitivity
The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in

percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto
Center tool. The higher the percentage, the sooner
the map is centered on the test vehicle when it
moves around on the route.
Previous View
Click the Previous View button to return to the

previous map view, for example, if you have moved
the map with the Pan tool.
Entire Map
Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map

after zooming in.
Entire Route
With the Entire Route button you can view the whole
route on the map.
Scale Bar
Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in

the map window.
Measure
Distance
With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the

distance on the map in kilometers between multiple
points.
Side Panel
Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel

in the map window.
12 SHORTCUT KEYS
This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed
by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.
Page 376
13 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS
Below are described the default notification symbols.

Attach Attempt
MMS Receiving Attempt
Attach Failed
MMS Receiving Failed
Attach Success
MMS Receiving Success

MMS Sending Attempt
Call Alerting
MMS Sending Failed
Call Answered
MMS Sending Success
Call Attempt
Call Connected
Packet Call Attempt
Call Disconnect
Packet Call Connected
Call Dropped
Packet Call Disconnected
Call Failed
Packet Call Failed
Call Received
Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA

Packet Technology Changed to UMTS
Cell Change Attempt
PTT Idle
Cell Change Failed
PTT Receiving
Cell Change Success
PTT Transmitting
Cell Reselection
Page 377
Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS
RX Level Low/Bad
Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM
Routing Area Update Attempt
Routing Area Update Failed

Context Activation Attempt
Routing Area Update Success
Context Activation Failed

Context Activation Success
Semiduplex Call Attempt
Context Deactivation
Service Lost
Service Received
Data Call Attempt

Data Connection Attempt
SMS/USSD Received
Data Connection Failed
SMS/USSD Receiving Attempt
Data Connection Success
SMS/USSD Receiving Failed
Data Disconnect
SMS/USSD Sending Completed
Data Transfer Attempt

Data Transfer Success
Soft Handover Failure
Data Transfer Failed
Soft Handover Success
Dead Reckoning in Use
TX Power High/UL Power Up High
Detach
Differential GPS in Use
Video Call Attempt
Duplex Call Attempt
Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt

(ETSI)
FER High
Voice Call Connected (ETSI)

Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)
GPS Fix Lost

GPS Fix Received
Page 378
Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)
HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed
Star
Thumb Down
Handover Attempt
Handover Failed
Handover Success
Location Area Update Attempt

Location Area Update Failed
Location Area Update Success
Marker
Markov Call Attempt
Measurement Error
Page 379
Thumb Up
14 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemosupport.anite.com, call us
(local phone numbers can be found in chapter Phone and Email Support) or send us an email at
nemosupport@anite.com. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.
14.1 User Club

Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it from
http://nemouserclub.anite.com.
Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical
Support agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW
maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the User Club,
please complete an on-line registration form.
After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and password by
email in a few days time.
Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you
each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is
available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
14.2 Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and RMA
requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and submit repair,
warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket, follow the status of
existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore the Nemo Support Portal
includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on Nemo Products. Submitting a
ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical specialists have all the necessary
information available to solve your support case, resulting in faster response times.
Please go to http://nemosupport.anite.com to access the portal and click Request access to obtain
a password to the system.
14.3 Phone and Email Support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support.
Nemo Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also send
us an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and
Support Agreement.
Please contact us at the following locations (global email address nemosupport@anite.com):
Page 380
Global
Tel.
+358 50 395 7800
Americas
Tel.
+1 469 951 9105

+1 469 774 4608 (En espaol e
portugus)
APAC
Tel.
+65 9746 2431
P.R. China
Tel.
+86 10 6567 8528
India
Tel.
Page 381
+91 982 0016372
15 APPENDIX 1
15.1 Making MapInfo raster maps

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into
MapInfo. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you
create in MapInfo. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a
map window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo can read the
following types of raster images:
filename.TIF
filename.GIF
filename.JPG
filename.PCX
filename.BMP
filename.BIL
Color options are:
Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.
Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray.
Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo
supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using
gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with
color map images.
15.1.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo SW

If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map
image so that MapInfo can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image
Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster
image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster
map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street
intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper
map.
To register a raster map:

1.
Start the MapInfo software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format.
Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration
Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.
Page 382
2.
Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do
not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.
3.
Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add
Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and
Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees,
30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south
coordinates. If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude
coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your
coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example, if you are registering
a UTM map image, enter coordinates in meters. Using the MapBasic program, you can
convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to
decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal
degrees
4.
You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and
selected in the map window.
5.
After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The
raster map will be displayed in the map window.
6.
Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or
Nemo Analyze.
7.
Page 383
Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.
16 APPENDIX 2
16.1 CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor

You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device
Settings
In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.
You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC can
also be overwritten by this plugin.
Page 384
Directory number defines a phone number

MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal
MIN2 defines a three-digit area code
SPC defines the service programming code
IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2
On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved
PRLs onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a
connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.
On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.
Page 385
Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from
CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for prl using the search tool on the
main page.
Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.
From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when
launched. This will add a tool bar called Presto to MS Excel.
Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.
Page 386
Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.
Click Next in the Welcome window.

Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next.
Click Next to confirm installation.
Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog.
Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO.
It should look as follows in Excel:
Page 387
17 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal

agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Network Testing Ltd for
the Anite Network Testing Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software
Product" or "Software"). The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media,
any printed materials, and any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or
otherwise using the Software Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do
not agree to the terms of this EULA, Anite Network Testing Ltd is unwilling to license the Software
Product to you. In such event, you may not use or copy the Software Product, and you should
promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within
thirty days of the date of original purchase.
SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights:
Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile
phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Network Testing Ltd for such use
("Designated Hardware"). You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the
Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to
be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of
the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct
system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary
for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product.
Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in
binary code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other
computers over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the
Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which
it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on
different computers.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation,
or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized
modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits
you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats.
Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or
otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are
expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or
by Anite Network Testing Ltd's prior written consent.
Page 388
Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component
parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as
designated above.
Not for Resale. This Software Product is Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits
personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as
specified below.
Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity.
Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights
under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Network Testing Ltd which such
consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
Security Mechanisms. Anite Network Testing and its affiliated companies take all legal steps to
eliminate piracy of their software products. In this context, the Software may include a security
mechanism that can detect the installation or use of illegal copies of the Software, and collect and
transmit data about those illegal copies. Data collected will not include any customer data created
with the Software. By using the Software, you consent to such detection and collection of data, as
well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected. Anite Network Testing also reserves
the right to use a hardware lock device, license administration software, and/or a license
authorization key to control access to the Software. You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat
the purpose of any such measures. Use of any Software without any required lock device or
authorization key provided by Anite Network Testing is prohibited.
Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media
package or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time.
Without prejudice to any other rights, Anite Network Testing Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies
of the Software Product and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts
and verify to Anite Network Testing Ltd in writing that such has been done.
3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Network Testing Ltd may provide you with support services related to
the Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part
of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms
and conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Network
Testing Ltd as part of the Support Services, Anite Network Testing Ltd may use such information for
its business purpose, including for product updates and development.
4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets",
incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
Software Product, are owned by Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is
protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed
materials accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite
Network Testing Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but
not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation,
in the Anite Network Testing Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime
resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments
originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product.
The Software Product may include following licenses with related copyrights and titles:
WinWAP. Copyright Winwap Technologies Oy. http://www.winwap.com
Page 389
Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis (POLQA) according to ITU-T Recommendation P. 863
included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other International
patents and patent applications and is provided under license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 www.opticom.de
POLQA is a registered trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission. 2011 by the POLQA
Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, Germany - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN, The Netherlands - TNO,
The Netherlands.
www.polqa.info
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the POLQA software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the POLQA software or for
normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverseengineering or decompiling the POLQA software except to the extent permitted by law; require that
the acknowledgement of the rights in the POLQA software shall not be removed from the POLQA
software or any installation of it;
Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is
protected by copyright and by European, US and other patents and is provided under license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2008 - www.opticom.de
For further information please refer to www.pesq.org
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the PESQ software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the PESQ software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering
or decompiling the PESQ software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the PESQ software shall not be removed from the PESQ software
or any installation of it;
Evaluation of Talker Quality (ECHO) measurement technology included in this product is protected
by copyright and is provided under license from
OPTICOM GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 - www.opticom.de
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the ECHO software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the ECHO software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering
or decompiling the ECHO software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the ECHO software shall not be removed from the ECHO software
or any installation of it;
Libresample library and libVLC library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed information, see
license files located in the software installation directory.
Skype is a trade mark of Skype or its related companies. This product/application has not been
approved or endorsed by Skype, Skype Communications S.a.r.l. or any of their related companies.
The license management portion of this Licensee Application is based on:
Page 390
SentinelRMS*
1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.
All rights reserved
SentinelRMSe*
1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.
All rights reserved
Iperf copyright. Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois. All
Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior
written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium.
Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is
appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install
the other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other
medium to another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the
Software Product.
6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose
in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the
Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Network
Testing Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect
your own like data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably
prudent person under the same or similar circumstances.
7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are
provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.
Page 391
8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Network Testing Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will
perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three
(3) months from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a
period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are
disclaimable, they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow
disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party
hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively.
9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your
exclusive remedy shall be, at Anite Network Testing Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid,
or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty
contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Network Testing Ltd. The Limited Warranty
contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident,
abuse, misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Network Testing Ltd including, but not
limited to Acts of God, acts of nature or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or
hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Anite Network Testing Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and
storage for your data or records.
10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Network
Testing Ltd disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to
implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of
third-party rights, with regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and
any accompanying hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have
others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law, in no event shall Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages
whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect
damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business
information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software
Product, even if Anite Network Testing Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In
any case, Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this
EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party
hardware accompanying the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section
apply to claims of every kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these
limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other
conduct. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.
Page 392

Nemo Outdoor User Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Nemo Outdoor User Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

WWW.ANITE.

NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

1 QUICK GUIDE .................................................................................................. 9

Setting up the system ............................................................................... 9

Data measurements ................................................................................ 10

Using Nemo Outdoor ............................................................................... 12

Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options .................................. 12

2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ........................................................................................ 13

Migration process for old USB dongle keys .......................................... 15

Migration process for new USB dongle keys ......................................... 17

Technical support expiration.............................................................. 18

Local laws and regulations ................................................................ 19

Nemo Outdoor laptop settings ........................................................... 19

Traffic safety .................................................................................. 20

Operating environment .................................................................... 21

3 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................ 22

Voice testing .......................................................................................... 22

Circuit-switched data testing ..................................................................... 22

Packet-switched data testing .................................................................... 22

Nemo Media Router ................................................................................. 23

Installing Nemo Media Router ............................................................ 23

Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license ................................. 26

TeamViewer QuickSupport ................................................................ 27

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite........................................................................... 29

Nemo Invex II ........................................................................................ 30

Indoor measurements .............................................................................. 31

4 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM............................................................... 32

Hardware and software requirements ......................................................... 32

Other hardware requirements ................................................................... 32

Nemo Outdoor software installation ........................................................... 33

Nemo Outdoor device set-up..................................................................... 33

Connecting a GPS receiver ................................................................ 33

Connecting a scanner ....................................................................... 34

Connecting voice quality devices ........................................................ 34

Nemo Invex device set-up ........................................................................ 34

Nemo Invex Status view ................................................................... 38

NEMO OUTDOOR USER MANUAL

Two data connections on one measurement server ............................... 39

General guidelines for drive testing ............................................................ 40

5 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................. 43

Configuring Nemo Outdoor ....................................................................... 43

Configuration through Welcome page ................................................. 43

Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog ........................ 47

Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually .................................................. 49

Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup ........ 49

Configuring test mobiles ........................................................................... 50

Configuration Manager ............................................................................. 51

Handler information ......................................................................... 52

User interface ................................................................................. 52

Base station files ............................................................................. 69

Device configurations ....................................................................... 69

Measurement Properties dialog.................................................................. 76

Measurement Properties General ..................................................... 77

Measurement Properties Measurement ............................................. 78

Measurement Properties Frequency scanning with mobiles .................. 82

Measurement Properties Pilot scanning with mobiles .......................... 85

Measurement Properties - Script ........................................................ 86

Nemo Commander server options ...................................................... 89

Initial field unit configuration ............................................................. 90

Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander ..... 91

Making scanning measurements ................................................................ 92

With a scanner ................................................................................ 92

With a mobile ................................................................................. 92